Contents

BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 272
1 of 272

Summary of Content for BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual PDF

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

X5 3.0si X5 4.8i

Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

2006 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 012 501 US English IX/06, 06 09 500 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Contents

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use the index, refer to page 250.

Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects

At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice command system

Controls 28 Opening and closing 40 Adjusting 52 Transporting children safely 56 Driving 67 Everything under control 80 Technology for comfort, convenience

and safety 97 Lamps 101 Climate 110 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips 122 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 130 Starting navigation system 131 Destination entry 143 Destination guidance 151 What to do if

Entertainment 154 On/Off and settings 158 Radio 162 Satellite radio 165 CD player and CD changer 171 External audio device 172 DVD system in rear

Communications 188 Telephoning 202 BMW Assist

Mobility 212 Refueling 214 Wheels and tires 222 Under the hood 226 Maintenance 228 Replacing components 236 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference 242 Technical data 245 Short commands of voice command

system 250 Everything from A to Z

N o

te s

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have made every effort to ensure that you are able to find what you need in this Owner's Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.

Additional sources of information If you have additional questions, your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center is always happy to advise you.

You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech- nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

5

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The individual vehicle When purchasing your BMW, you have decided in favor of a model with individualized equip- ment and features. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equip- ment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible that the features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires specially adapted mainte- nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor- responding work on your BMW performed only by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out prop- erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

N o

te s

6

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW Sports Activity Vehi- cle Centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive dam- age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter- fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. Refer to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

7

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- 1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

C o

ck p

it

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Rear window safety switch 38

2 Opening and closing windows 37

3 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 48

4 Adjusting exterior mirrors 48 Automatic curb monitor* 49

5 Instrument lighting 99

Fog lamps* 99

6 Parking lamps 97

Low beams 97

Automatic headlamp control* 97 Adaptive Head Light* 98

7 Head-Up Display* 94

A t

a g

la n

ce

11

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

9 Instrument cluster 12

12 Ignition lock 56

13 Buttons on steering wheel

14 Horn, entire surface

17 Releasing hood 222

8 Turn signals 62

High beams, headlamp flasher 99

Roadside parking lamps* 99

Time, date, outside temperature, Check Control 67, 75

Computer 69

10 Windshield wipers 63

Rain sensor 63

Rear window wiper 64

11 Starting/stopping engine and switching ignition on/off 56

Telephone*:

> Press: accepting and ending call, starting dialing* for selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected

> Press longer: redialing

Volume

Activating/deactivating voice com- mand system* 23

Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling in phone book and in lists with stored phone numbers

Individually programmable* 50

Individually programmable* 50

Steering wheel heating* 50

15 Steering wheel adjustment 49

16 Cruise control* 64

C o

ck p

it

12

Instrument cluster

1 Indicator lamps for turn signals

2 Speedometer

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Tachometer 68

5 Energy Control 68

6 Display for

> Clock/date 67

> Outside temperature 67

> Indicator and warning lamps 74

> Speed of cruise control* 64

7 Display for

> Odometer and trip odometer 67

> Computer 69

> Date and remaining travel distance for service requirements 71

> Automatic transmission positions 59

> HDC Hill Descent Control 85

> Check Control message present 74

> Adaptive Drive* 86

8 Fuel gauge 68

9 Resetting trip odometer 67 Displaying service requirement 67

A t

a g

la n

ce

13

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.

Some lamps are tested for proper function by briefly lighting up during starting of the engine or when the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con- trol Display explain the meaning of the dis- played indicator and warning lamps.

Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on the corresponding need to take action can be displayed via the Check Con- trol, refer to page 74.

In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor- mation is displayed immediately when the related lamp lights up.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps indicate that cer- tain functions are activated:

With parking brake set 58

With parking brake set for Canadian models

Fog lamps* 99

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 85

High beams/headlamp flasher 99

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC controls the drive and braking forces for maintaining vehicle stability 84

C o

ck p

it

14

Around the center console: controls and displays

A t

a g

la n

ce

15

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

1 Microphone for handsfree mode for telephone* and for voice command system* 23

2 Initiatingan emergency call 236

3 Reading lamps 100

4 Panorama glass sunroof* 38

5 Interior lamps 100

6 Passenger airbag status lamp 92

7 Control Display 16 Displays for menu navigation

8 Hazard warning flashers

9 Central locking system 29

10 Opening glove compartment 113

11 Automatic climate control 102

12 Ejecting audio CD

13 Changing

> radio station 154

> track 154

14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer

15 Selecting AM or FM waveband

16 Ejecting navigation DVD with Professional navigation system* 130

18 Controller 16 Turn, press or move horizontally in four directions

19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

20 Parking brake 57

21 Adaptive Drive 86

22 Programmable memory/direct selection buttons 21

23 Switching Entertainment sound output on/off and adjusting volume 154

Manual air distribution 103

Automatic air distribution and volume 102

Cooling function 104

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Maximum cooling 104

Air volume 103 Residual heat utilization 105

Defrosting windows and removing condensation 103

Rear window defroster 103

Seat heating* 47

Active seat ventilation* 47

17 Opening liftgate 33

Active seat* 48

PDC Park Distance Control* 80 Backup camera* 81

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 85

HDC Hill Descent Control 85

iD ri

ve

16

iDrive

iDrive combines the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a central position. The following section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of the individual func- tions is described in connection with the rele- vant equipment.

Controls

1 Control Display

2 button Opening start menu

3 Controller With the controller you can select menu items and make settings:

> move in four directions, arrows 4

> turn, arrow 5

> press, arrow 6

To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard due to inattention, both to your own vehi-

cle's occupants and to other road users: never attempt to use the controls or make entries unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

A t

a g

la n

ce

17

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Menu overview

Communication > Telephone* > BMW Assist* or TeleService*

Navigation or onboard information > Navigation system* > Onboard information, e.g. for displaying

the average fuel consumption

Entertainment > Radio

> CD player and CD changer* > External audio device

Climate > Vent settings

> Seat heater distribution* > Automatic programs

> Parked car ventilation*

menu > Switching off Control Display

> Tone and display settings

> Settings for traffic information* > Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central

locking system

> Display of maintenance intervals and dead- lines for legally mandated inspections

> Settings for telephone*

Operating principle From radio readiness, refer to page 56, the fol- lowing message is shown on the Control Dis- play:

To hide the message: Press the controller. This displays the start menu.

On vehicles with a single drive, the message automatically disappears after approx. 10 sec- onds.

Start menu

You can call up all the functions of iDrive using five menu items.

Opening start menu Press the button.

To open the start menu from the menu:

Press the button twice.

iD ri

ve

18

Opening menu items of start menu

With the start menu you can open the menu items Communication, Navigation, Entertain- ment and Climate by moving the controller to the left, right, front or rear.

You can open the menu by pressing the con- troller.

Comfort opening of menu items Comfort opening offers you:

> Opening of a menu item of the start menu in the last display shown

> Direct changing between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without pressing the button

For this purpose, move the controller in the cor- responding direction and hold it for longer than approx. 2 seconds.

Displays in menu

1 Each menu is divided into fields. The respective active field is highlighted.

2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu item of the start menu:

1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- tal or vertical lists.

2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible.

3 Settings are displayed graphically or numerically.

Communication

Navigation or onboard information

Entertainment

Climate

menu

A t

a g

la n

ce

19

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Operating principle at a glance Basic operation via iDrive is described in this view.

You can view the individual steps under Set- tings on Control Display, Brightness of Control Display, refer to page 78.

1 Selecting menu item:

> Turn the controller; the highlight moves

> Menu items shown in white can be selected by highlighting

2 Activating menu item:

> Press the controller

> New menu items are displayed or the function is carried out

3 Selecting menu item: refer to 1

4 Changing between fields:

> Briefly move the controller left, right, forward or back

> Release controller

> Active field appears lighter

5 Adjusting settings:

> Turn controller

> Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed

> Confirmation by changing field

iD ri

ve

20

Status information

1 Display for:

> Entertainment: Radio, CD

> Telephone* in "Communication": Name of linked mobile phone, network search or no network

> "BMW Assist"*: Existing voice connection with a service from BMW Assist

2 Entertainment sound output off

3 Display for traffic information*, TI: Traffic information for the navigation sys- tem can be received and transmission is switched on

4 Display for:

> New entries present in "Missed calls"* > Roaming active

5 Telephoning* possible if the mobile phone is logged-on in the vehicle

Mobile phone network with strong reception, display dependent on mobile phone

6 Time

Other displays: The status information is temporarily hidden when there are Check Control instructions or inputs via the voice command system*.

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the assistance window:

> The computer or the trip computer* > The arrow or map view with a navigation

system* > The current position

Selecting display 1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.

A t

a g

la n

ce

21

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Switching assistance window off/on 1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the controller.

To switch on, change to the assistance window and press the controller.

Switching Control Display off/on 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control- ler.

To switch on, press the controller.

Programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store and run certain functions of iDrive on the direct selection buttons:

> Destinations of navigation

> Entertainment:

> radio station

> CD

> CD compartment of CD changer

> AUX

> Telephone: phone numbers

Saving function

Navigation 1. Select navigation destination, e.g. in the

destination list or the address book.

2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.

Special features:

> With the destination guidance system and the map view started, the current destina- tion is stored.

> During destination entry via a map, the coordinates at the cursor are stored, not the current destination.

Communication 1. Enter the phone number or select it in a list

of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the A-Z list.

2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.

If a name is assigned to the phone number, the name will also be stored.

Entertainment The source being played at the time of saving, e.g. a radio station or a certain CD of the CD player, is stored in the Entertainment menu, and not what is selected with controller.

iD ri

ve

22

1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta- tion or CD.

2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.

If the vehicle is equipped with two drives, the current track is stored for CDs with

compressed audio files.<

Running function Press the ... button.

The function is run immediately. This means, for example, that when a phone number is selected, the connection is also established, or when a navigation destination is called up, des- tination guidance is started.

Displaying button assignment You can display the assignment of the buttons by touching them with your finger. Please do not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with an object, e.g. a pen, does not function.

Displaying short info Touch the ... button.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed.

Navigation destination

Entertainment source

Phone number

Not assigned

Displaying detailed information Touch and hold the ... button.

Deleting button assignments 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and press the controller.

6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory keys" and press the controller.

A t

a g

la n

ce

23

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Voice command system

The concept The voice command system allows you to con- trol operation of various vehicle systems with- out ever removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. This frees you of having to use the controller.

The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

Precondition Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the voice command system in order to enable iden- tification of the spoken commands. To set the language of iDrive, refer to page 79.

Symbols in Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating voice command system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal tell you that the voice command system can respond to com- mands.

2. Say the command. The command is displayed on the Control Display.

This symbol is shown on the Control Display when you can input additional commands. If no other commands are possible, then oper- ate the equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice command system Press the button on the steering wheel or

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice command system.

{Cancel}

V o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

24

Commands

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi- ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display. To have the system list the possible com- mands:

For example, if you have selected "CD", the system will read aloud the possible commands for operating the CD player and the CD changer*.

Opening help

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

Running functions directly with short commands With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu item is selected, refer to page 245.

Opening start menu

Example: selecting a track 1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if

necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

5. Press the button on the steering wheel.

{Options}

{Help}

{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}

{Main menu}

3. {Entertainment} The system says: {{Entertainment}}

4. {CD} The system says: {{CD drive switched on}}

6. Select track, e.g.: {Track 1} The system says: {{Track 1}}

A t

a g

la n

ce

25

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Notes The mobile phone can also be operated with voice commands, refer to

page 197.<

For voice commands, bear the following in mind:

> Say the commands and numbers smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. This also applies to spelling when entering the destination.

> Always issue commands in the language of the voice command system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the common pronunciation of the station name.

> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbrevia- tions.

> Keep the doors, windows and panorama glass sunroof* closed to prevent interfer- ence from ambient noise.

> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle. Its extensive array of features and accessories,

both for driving and for your own safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

28

Opening and closing

Keys/remote control

1 Remote control with integrated key

2 Spare key

3 Adapter for spare key

Remote control with integrated key Each remote control contains a battery which is automatically charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice a year to keep the battery charged. For comfort access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 37.

Depending on which remote control is detected by the vehicle during unlocking, different set- tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle, refer to Personal Profile, page 28.

Information on the required maintenance is also stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in remote control, page 226.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Driver's door, refer to page 31

> Lockable floor panel flap* in cargo bay

New remote controls To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new remote controls with an integrated key are available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Spare key Store the spare key in a safe place such as your wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.

The spare key and integrated key fit the same locks.

Adapter for spare key The adapter is required so that the vehicle can be started with the spare key or radio readiness can be switched on.

Push the spare key into the adapter before use.

Personal Profile

The concept You can set a number of functions of your BMW individually according to your preferences. Per- sonal Profile ensures that most of these set- tings are stored for the remote control currently in use without you having to do anything. When the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding

C o

n tr

o ls

29

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

remote control is detected and the settings stored for it are called up and carried out.

This means that you will always find your BMW set to your own personal settings even if another person with his/her own remote control and settings has used the vehicle since the last time you drove it. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of three remote controls.

Personal Profile settings Details on the settings are provided on the specified pages.

> When unlocking with the remote control, either unlock only the driver's door or the entire vehicle, refer to page 30

> Locking the vehicle after a short time or after starting off, refer to page 32

> Assigning the programmable buttons* on the steering wheel, refer to page 50

> Settings for the display on the Control Dis- play:

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 78

> Measuring units for consumption, route/ distances, temperature, and pressure, refer to page 79

> Language on Control Display, refer to page 79

> 12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to page 78

> Date format, refer to page 78

> Showing optical warning for PDC Park Dis- tance Control*, refer to page 81

> Selection, brightness and position of dis- play in Head-Up Display*, refer to page 94

> For settings of automatic climate control, refer to page 102

> Positions of driver's seat, exterior mirrors, and steering wheel*, refer to page 42

> With Adaptive Drive*, last selected chassis and suspension tuning setting, refer to page 86

> Audio sources, volume and tone settings, refer to page 155

> Radio, displaying stored stations, refer to page 158

> Telephone, setting volume, refer to pages 192, 198

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 97, and daytime running lamps, refer to page 98

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 62

> With backup camera*, selection of func- tions, refer to page 82 and type of display, refer to page 83

> With programmable memory/direct selec- tion buttons, selection of stored functions, refer to page 21

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system is ready for opera- tion whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Liftgate

> Fuel filler door

Operating from outside > via the remote control

> via the door lock

> with comfort access* via the door handles

At the same time, the anti-theft system is also operated. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps* are also switched on and off with the remote control. The alarm systemis armed/dis- armed at the same time. You can find more detailed information on the alarm systemon page 34.

Operating from inside Via the button for central locking, refer to page 32. The fuel filler door is not locked.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

30

In an accident of sufficient severity, the central locking system automatically unlocks the vehi- cle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from outside

Using remote control Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from

the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<

Unlocking Press the button. This unlocks the vehicle.

You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con- troller.

8. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only" Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

9. Press the controller.

Comfort opening Press the button longer. The windows and the panorama glass sunroof* are opened.

Locking Press the button.

Switching on interior lamps With vehicle locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode* You can also trigger the alarm system in case of danger:

Press the button for at least 3 seconds.

Switch off alarm: press any button.

Unlocking liftgate Press the button for approx. 1 second.

The liftgate will open slightly, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

C o

n tr

o ls

31

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

During opening, the liftgate pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is

available before opening. To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, never lay the remote control in the cargo bay. A previously locked liftgate is also locked again after closing.<

If pointed or sharp-edged objects could strike the rear window while driving, be

sure to provide protection around all edges. Failure to do so could result in damage to the heating conductors of the rear window.<

Setting confirmation signals You can vary or also deactivate the confirmation signals for locking or unlocking.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con- troller.

7. Select the desired signal.

8. Press the controller. The signal is activated.

Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. Should the remote control fail to operate due to interference of this kind,

unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock using a key.

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle using the remote control, then the battery is discharged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, refer to page 28.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using door lock

When unlocking 1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's

door and the fuel filler door.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

32

2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the remaining doors and the liftgate.

Comfort operation You also operate the windows and the pan- orama glass sunroof* from the driver's door lock.

Turn and hold the key in the positions for unlocking or locking.

Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Releasing the

key stops the operation.<

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can turn a key all the way to the right or left in the door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the liftgate, with the front doors closed. It does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.

You can also set the situations in which the vehicle is locked.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

7. Select a menu item:

> "Relock door if not opened" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle after a short time when no door has been opened.

> "Lock after driving" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive.

8. Press the controller. The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors > Either unlock the doors together with the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking > Use the central locking button to lock all of

the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

C o

n tr

o ls

33

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from

the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<

Liftgate During opening, the liftgate pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is

available before opening.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: the liftgate opens somewhat unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Press the button on the liftgate or the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second: The liftgate opens somewhat. It can be swung upward.

Opening manually In case of an electrical malfunction:

1. From the cargo bay, press out the handle in the liftgate, refer to arrow, with a screw- driver and pull. The liftgate is unlocked.

2. Open the liftgate and press in the handle.

The liftgate is locked again as soon as it is closed.

Closing Make sure that the closing path of the lift- gate is clear, otherwise injuries may

result.<

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the liftgate make it easier to pull down.

If pointed or sharp-edged objects could strike the rear window while driving, be

sure to provide protection around all edges. Failure to do so could result in damage to the heating conductors of the rear window.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

34

Tailgate

Opening

Pull lever. You can fold the tailgate down.

When opened, the tailgate can accept loads of up to 550 lbs./250 kg. When the

vehicle is stationary you may, for example, uti- lize the tailgate as a seat or as a loading platform for luggage or recreation gear.

Closing Fold the tailgate up and press closed.

Alarm system

The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:

> When a door, the hood or the liftgate is opened

> To movements in the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 35

> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle

> To interruptions in battery voltage

Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by the alarm system:

> with an acoustic alarm

> by switching onthe hazard warning flashers

> by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

The liftgate can also be opened with the system armed with the button on the remote con- trol, refer to page 30. When the liftgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again.

Switching off alarm > Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,

refer to page 30.

> Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

> The indicator lamp under the interior rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the doors, hood or liftgate are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 sec- onds. However, the interior motion sensor is not activated.

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.

> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted into the ignition lock, however for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

C o

n tr

o ls

35

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted wheel theft or towing.

Interior motion sensor In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and panorama glass sunroof* must be completely closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This pre- vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In stacking garages

> When transporting on car-carrying trains, by sea or on a trailer

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- quently locked again.

Comfort access* Comfort access enables you to access your vehicle without having to hold the remote con- trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote control with you, e.g. in your hand or jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the related remote control in the imme- diate vicinity or in the interior.

Comfort access supports the following func- tions:

> Unlocking/locking vehicle

> Comfort closing

> Opening liftgate

> Starting engine

Functional requirement > The vehicle can only be unlocked if the

vehicle detects that the remote control car- ried is not located in the vehicle interior.

> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started if the vehicle detects that the remote control is located in the vehicle interior.

Comparison with ordinary remote control You can control the functions mentioned previ- ously with the comfort access or by pressing the buttons on the remote control. Therefore, please familiarize yourself with the information on opening and closing beginning on page 28 beforehand.

The special features when using comfort access are described in the following.

Should a short delay occur when opening or closing the windows or the panorama

glass sunroof*, the system is checking whether a remote control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat opening or closing if necessary.<

Unlocking

Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Locking Touch the area highlighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.

This corresponds to pressing the but- ton.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

36

Please make sure that all electronic sys- tems/consumers are switched off before

locking to save the battery.<

Comfort closing Hold a finger or the back of a hand on the sur- face, arrow 2.

The windows and the panorama glass sunroof* are closed.

Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Removing the

hand from the door handle stops the closing process immediately.<

Opening liftgate Press the button on the liftgate. This corresponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo bay is detected in the locked vehi-

cle after closing the liftgate, the liftgate opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 56.

When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal, otherwise the engine will start.<

Starting engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion if a remote control is located in the interior of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni- tion lock, refer to page 56.

As long as no remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off if no door has been opened.

Switching off engine > Remote control not in ignition lock:

After switching off the engine, the transmis- sion is automatically switched into trans- mission position P.

> Remote control in ignition lock: If transmission position N is engaged, the transmission remains in this position after the engine is switched off.

Before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps:

1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Engage transmission position N.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Switch off the engine.

6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

Malfunction The comfort access function may malfunction due to local radio waves. Then open or close the vehicle with the buttons on the remote control or with a key. To start the engine following this, insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when an attempt is made to start the engine: starting the

engine is not possible. The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take along the remote control into the vehicle or have it checked. Insert another remote control into the ignition lock if necessary.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer in the vehicle. After switching off the engine, the engine can only be started again within approx. 10 seconds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery of the remote control.

C o

n tr

o ls

37

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Replacing battery The remote control for comfort access contains a battery which must be replaced if necessary.

1. Remove integrated key from remote con- trol, refer to page 28.

2. Remove cover.

3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing upward.

4. Press cover closed.

Dispose of used batteries at a collection point or at your BMW Sports Activity

Vehicle Center.<

Windows To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the windows and keep them in

your field of vision until they are shut. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, operate the windows and injure them- selves.<

Opening, closing

> Press switch to resistance point: The window continues to open as long as you keep the switch pressed.

> Press switch beyond resistance point: The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Separate switches for the rear windows are located in the rear.

For information on using the comfort operation at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 30 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort access, refer to page 36.

After switching off ignition You can still operate the windows with the remote control removed or the ignition switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force rises beyond a predefined threshold during closing, the system will stop moving the window prior to lowering it again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the window's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired.<

Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside or if, for example, ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro- ceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold. The pinch protection system is limited and the window opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

38

The window closes without the pinch pro- tection system.

Safety switch

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear windows from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area, by chil- dren, for example. The LED lights up when this safety feature is activated.

Always press the safety switch when chil- dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-

trolled closing of the windows could lead to injuries.<

Panorama glass sunroof* The panorama glass sunroof is ready for opera- tion with the ignition switched on, refer to page 56.

To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the panorama glass sunroof and

keep it in your field of vision until it is closed. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, operate the roof and injure them- selves.<

Raising, opening, closing

Press the switch or slide it in the desired direc- tion up to the resistance point.

With the sliding visor open, the roof can be closed, opened and raised independently.

With the sunroof closed or raised, the sliding visor can be opened and closed independently.

For information on using the comfort operation at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 30 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort access, refer to page 36.

Ventilation setting Press the switch: The sunroof is raised and the sliding visor is opened slightly.

Opening and closing automatically Press the switch beyond the resistance point. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening and closing sunroof and sliding visor together Press the switch beyond the resistance point twice consecutively. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position Each time the panorama glass sunroof is com- pletely opened and then closed, it stops in the comfort position. If desired, continue the motion following this with the switch.

In the comfort position the wind noises in the interior are reduced.

C o

n tr

o ls

39

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Pinch protection system If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor encounter resistance when closing from roughly one third of the sunroof opening or when closing from the raised position, the clos- ing action is interrupted and the panorama glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.

Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof would con- tinue closing.<

Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside, press the switch beyond the resistance point and hold. The roof closes without the pinch protection system.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power loss, the sunroof may only respond to the raise command. Then have the system initialized. BMW recommends having this work carried out by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Moving manually In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the roof manually:

1. Fold down the cover. To do this, press the clips in the notches on each side with a screwdriver.

2. Remove the operating unit.

3. Remove the engine connector. The effort required for manual movement is consider- ably reduced.

4. Remove the Allen key from the mounting next to the toolkit and insert it in the open- ing provided. Move the panorama glass sunroof in the desired direction.

5. Reinstall the operating unit.

A d

ju st

in g

40

Adjusting

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the interaction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seat position plays an important role in an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the fol- lowing section.

For additional information on Transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 52.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini- mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms in the event of airbag deployment. No one and nothing is to come between the air- bags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Make sure that occupants do not rest their head on the side or head airbag, otherwise injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.<

Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju- ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 92.

Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an accident.<

Push the head restraints of the 3rd row seats* into the top position.

Head restraints, refer to page 43.

Safety belts Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Depending on its equipment, your vehicle has either five or seven seats, which are all provided with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos- sible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in the upper body area periodically to readjust the tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the restraint of the safety belt. If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the larger backrest half must be locked, refer to page 117, otherwise the center safety belt has no restraining action.<

Safety belts, refer to page 45.

C o

n tr

o ls

41

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Seats

Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust or calibrate your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat

could respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. Never adjust manually adjustable seats while the vehicle is moving, as otherwise the restrain- ing effect of these seats during accidents could be reduced. Also on the passenger side, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally pro- vided by the belt.<

Also observe the information on damage to safety belts on page 46 and on the height of the head restraints on page 43.

Adjusting seat To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on page 40.<

1 Longitudinal direction

2 Height

3 Angle

4 Backrest

Adjusting comfort seat* In this seat, you can also adjust:

1 Backrest width

2 Shoulder support

3 Thigh support

4 Lumbar support*, see below

Backrest width The width of the backrest can be changed with the side wings to adjust the side support to your own needs.

Shoulder support This also supports the back in the shoulder area, provides a relaxed sitting position and helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.

A d

ju st

in g

42

Adjusting lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: press front or rear section of switch.

> Shift curvature up or down: press upper or lower section of switch.

Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory* You can store and select two different adjust- ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir- rors and steering wheel.

The adjustment of the backrest width and lum- bar support is not stored in the memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer to page 56.

2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel positions.

3. Press the button: The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: The LED goes out.

The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi- tions are stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Calling up automatically You can choose when the stored driver's seat and exterior mirror positions are called up.

> Calling up when unlocking vehicle

> Calling up when opening driver's door

When using this feature, always make sure that the footwell behind the driver's

seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<

The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting calling up automatically iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

43

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con- troller.

8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".

9. Press the controller.

Deactivating calling up automatically Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.

Calling up manually Do not call up a position from the memory while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk

of accident from unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel.<

Comfort mode 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on radio readiness.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and maintain pressure until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed inadvertently: press the button again; the LED goes out.

Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove the head restraints if the respective seat is not occupied. Reinstall the head restraints before transporting passen- gers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot provide its protective function.<

Front seats: setting the height of the head restraint

You can adjust the height of the head restraints electrically.

Removing:

1. Tilt the backrest toward the rear.

2. Move the head restraint up as far as possi- ble.

3. Pull out the head restraint completely with a firm movement.

Installing:

1. Push the switch upward for a maximum of approx. 10 seconds, however if possible only until a change of the humming noise indicates that the installed head restraint would have been moved all the way to the top.

2. Insert the head restraint and press down on both sides until it is heard and felt to engage.

A d

ju st

in g

44

Front seats: setting the angle of the head restraint Swivel the head restraint.

With the comfort seat, use the shoulder support to set the distance to the back of the head.

Adjusting side extensions* of head restraints with comfort seat

You can fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

Rear seats and 3rd row seats*

Adjusting height

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1,and push the head restraint downward.

Rear seats

2nd row seats* The 2nd row seats are divided. You can adjust each side separately.

Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the vehicle is moving, as otherwise the pas-

sengers on the 3rd row seats could be injured. Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd row seats properly engage following adjust- ment. Otherwise the restraining effect of the safety belts during an accident could be reduced.<

Longitudinal direction n

1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired position.

2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly forward or back so that it engages properly.

Backrest The backrests can be adjusted in four steps. n

Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove weight from the backrest as needed.

C o

n tr

o ls

45

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Access to 3rd row seats n

Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.

The handle recess on the interior trim of the door pillar makes climbing in easier.<

When folding back the 2nd row seats, make sure that the footwell under the

2nd row seats is clear. Otherwise persons in the 3rd row seats could be injured or objects dam- aged.<

Warning lamp for 2nd row seats: Lights up when the second row seats are not locked. A message also

appears on the Control Display.

3rd row seats* The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space for two persons.

Folding up backrest Before folding up the backrest, remove the roll- up cover, refer to page, 116.

1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is unlocked.

n

2. Fold up and engage the backrest.

Make sure that the catch engages securely. If it is not properly engaged,

transported cargo could enter the passen-

ger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu- pants.<

3. Push the head restraints into the top posi- tion.

4. Release the latch plate on the safety belt from the mount, refer to arrow 1, and insert it into the buckle of the safety belt, refer to arrow 2. The latch plate must audibly engage.

n

Folding backrest down 1. Push down the head restraint, refer to

page 44.

2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The backrests are released.

n

3. Fold the backrest down.

Safety belts To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on page 40.<

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi-

A d

ju st

in g

46

tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute. n

Fastening Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and passenger seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. A message also appears on the Control Display.

Please check whether the safety belt is cor- rectly fastened.

The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the passenger seat.

Releasing 1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 41.

The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right. The belt buckle embossed with the word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by passengers riding in the center position.

Damage to safety belts In the event of loads caused by accidents or other damage: replace the belt system

including the safety belt tensioners and any child restraint systems, and have the belt

anchor points checked. Only have this work carried out at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise correct operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<

Belt-force limiter The effect of the belt-force limiter on the driver's seat is dependent on the position of the driver's seat.

To maintain the long-term accuracy of this function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a corresponding message is displayed on the Control Display.

Calibrating driver's seat The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage also appears on the Control Dis- play. Please calibrate the driver's seat.

1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.

2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It briefly moves toward the front in the pro- cess.

3. Set the desired seating position again.

The calibration is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. Should this message continue to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear even after repeated calibration, have the sys- tem checked as soon as possible.

Never carry out calibration while the vehi- cle is moving, as otherwise accidents

could occur. During the calibration, make sure that no per- sons or objects are pinched, as otherwise inju- ries or damage could occur.<

C o

n tr

o ls

47

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Seat heating*

Front

The temperature setting progresses one step through its control sequence each time you press the button. The maximum temperature is supplied when three LEDs are lit.

To switch off: press the button longer.

Temperature distribution The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press the controller.

4. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Driver" or "Passenger".

5. Turn the controller. The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

Rear

Operation similar to front seat heating; without temperature distribution.

Active seat ventilation* and seat heating*

Front

1 Seat heating

2 Active seat ventilation

Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the temperature or ventilation position. The LED in the respective button lights up.

The temperature or ventilation positions are indicated on the Control Display, refer to tem- perature or air distribution.

To switch off: press and hold button 1 or 2.

Temperature or air distribution The heat output or ventilation can be distrib- uted variously in the seat cushion and the back- rest.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

A d

ju st

in g

48

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Driver's seat climate" or "Passen- ger's seat climate" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu- tion. The setting is applied.

Heated rear seats Operation similar to front seat heating; without temperature distribution, refer to page 47.

Active seat*

The seat cushion is actively varied by alter- nately raising and lowering the right and left half of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular ten- sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.

Press the button to switch on; the LED lights up.

If you switch off the active seat, it can take up to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat cushion have returned to their initial position.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The mirror on the passenger's side is more curved than the driver's mirror.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance of following traffic based on what you see in the mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci- dent risk.<

1 Adjusting

2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto- matic curb monitor

3 Folding mirrors in and out* Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir- ror and steering wheel memory on page 42.

Manual adjustment You can also adjust the mirrors manually by pressing against the outer edges of their mirror glass.

Folding mirrors in and out* Pressing button 3 allows you to fold the mirrors in and out again up to a speed of approx. 12 mph/20 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mirrors that have been manually folded in back into the correct position. Folded in mirrors fold out again at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Before going through a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-

erwise they could be damaged, depending on the width of the car wash system.<

C o

n tr

o ls

49

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Automatic heating Below a certain outdoor temperature, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated when the motor is running or the ignition is switched on.

Tilting down passenger-side exterior mirror automatic curb monitor*

Activating 1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror

position, arrow 1.

2. Engage transmission position R. The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat on the passenger's side. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle such as a curb when park- ing, etc.

Deactivating Slide switch into the passenger side mirror position, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi- cles at night, turn the knob.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*

This feature is controlled by two photocells in the interior rearview mirror. One is integrated into the glass of the mirror, while the other is located at an offset position on the rear of the mirror housing.

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells clean and do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield in front of the mirror, either.

Steering wheel

Adjusting Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-

dent as the result of unexpected movement.<

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions.

Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on page 42.

A d

ju st

in g

50

Easy entry/exit* To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel temporarily moves into the uppermost position.

Steering wheel heating*

Press the button with the ignition switched on; the LED lights up.

Programmable buttons* on steering wheel

You can program the buttons individually.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press the controller.

A list of different functions appears:

> "Navigation voice instructions" Voice instructions for the navigation system*

> "Air recirculation on / off" Permanently shutting off outside air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control on page 105

> "Mute on / off" Mutes the audio sources

> "Monitor on / off" Switches the Control Display on/off

> "Telephone list"* Display/hide phone book or last list of stored phone numbers

> "Next entertainment source" Changes audio source

5. Select the desired function and press the controller.

6. Select the button if necessary and press the controller.

You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button.

C o

n tr

o ls

51

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Operating function Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:

> To switch voice instructions on/off: Hold the button down.

> To repeat the last voice instruction: Press the button.

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

52

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger

themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening the doors.<

Children always in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only

be transported on the 2nd row seats in child restraint systems which correspond to the age, weight and height of the child. Otherwise there is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.

Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags on the passen- ger side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury for the child if the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint system. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 93.

Installing child restraint systems

Observe the child restraint system manu- facturer's instructions for selection,

installation and use of the child restraint sys- tems. Otherwise the degree of protection may be reduced.<

For equipment with 3rd row seats*, make sure that the seat of the 2nd row seats on

which the child restraint system is mounted is properly locked. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury for the child in an acci- dent. Do not mount child restraint systems on the 3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection pro- vided by these child restraint systems may be reduced.<

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that

the front and side airbags on the front passen- ger side have been deactivated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury when the air- bags are triggered.<

Backrest width* on front passenger seat

The backrest width adjustment of the front passenger seat must be completely

open, as otherwise the child's seat cannot com- pletely contact the backrest. After the child's seat is installed, do not request any memory position, as otherwise there is the risk of injury.<

1. Backrest width adjustment completely open, refer to page 41.

2. Install child's seat.

C o

n tr

o ls

53

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Child seat security

All safety belts of the 2nd row seats and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked against pulling out to secure child restraint systems.

Locking safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull taut against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com- pletely.

Child restraint system with tether strap Only use the tether-strap mounting points to secure child restraint systems,

otherwise the mounting points could be dam- aged. Do not mount child restraint systems on the 3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection pro- vided by these child restraint systems may be reduced.<

There are three additional mounting points for child restraint systems with a tether strap on the 2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out before using the center mounting point.

Placement of tether strap

1 Forward driving direction

2 Head restraint

3 Attaching clip

4 Child restraint anchor fitting

5 Backrest

6 Tether strap

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

54

When using the cargo bay cover, the upper retaining strap must be routed between the rear backrest and the cargo bay cover.

Mounting tether strap on 2nd row seats On outer seats:

1. Slide the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint brackets.

3. Hook in the upper retaining strap on the mounting point with the hook.

4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom position.

5. Pull upper retaining strap taut.

On center seat with equipment with two rows of seats:

1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward the front.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap through the opening in the center armrest.

3. Fold back and engage the center armrest.

4. Hook in the upper retaining strap at the mounting point.

5. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.

On center seat with equipment with three rows of seats:

1. Slide head restraint upward.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint brackets.

3. Hook in the upper retaining strap on the mounting point with the hook.

4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom position.

5. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil- dren.

To attach and use a LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and safety

instructions of the system manufacturer.<

Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull the belt away from the region of the child restraint fixing system.

Access to brackets

The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Make sure that both lower LATCH anchor fittings are properly engaged and the

child restraint system firmly contacts the back- rest.<

C o

n tr

o ls

55

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

On trips If the vehicle is equipped with rear side airbags, make sure that children do not

lean out of the child's seat towards the door panels. Otherwise injuries can be caused if the side airbags are triggered.<

Child-safety locks for rear doors

Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors: The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for power windows Always press the safety switch for the power windows, refer to page 38, when children are riding in the rear of the vehicle.

D ri

vi n

g

56

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock. Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation.

Removing remote control from ignition lock Briefly press in the remote control; it is pushed out somewhat. The ignition is switched off if it was still switched on.

Start/Stop button

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button several times switches the radio readiness or the igni- tion on and off.

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button with the brake pedal depressed starts the

engine.<

Radio readiness Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The time and outside tempera- ture are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is automatically switched off:

> when the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> with comfort access* by touching the sen- sitive surface on the door handle, refer to Locking on page 35

Ignition on All electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The odometer and the trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to page 67.

Please switch off the ignition and the electronic systems/consumers which are

not required when the engine is not running to save the battery.<

Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps in the instru- ment cluster go out.

Starting engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, as such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select neutral or transmission position P and set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

When starting the engine, do not press the accelerator pedal.

C o

n tr

o ls

57

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, drive off at a moderate engine speed.

The engine starts when you depress the brake pedal while briefly pressing the

Start/Stop button.<

Procedure 1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Briefly press the Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag- ing the starter for a certain period and automat- ically disengaging it as soon as the engine starts.

Special starting conditions Depress the accelerator pedal half way when starting the engine in the following situations:

> The engine fails to start on the first attempt, e.g. if it is very hot or cold.

> The engine is started at very low tempera- tures, below approx. +57/156, at high altitudes, over approx. 3,300 ft/1,000 m.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated starting attempts in

which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.<

Switching off engine When leaving the vehicle, always take the remote control with you.

When parking on a downhill incline, set the parking brake, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.<

Procedure 1. Engage transmission position P with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Briefly press the Start/Stop button.

Procedure before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps:

1. With comfort access*: insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. With the engine running, engage transmis- sion position N.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Switch off the engine.

6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

Transmission position P will be engaged:

> automatically after approx. 30 minutes

> if you remove the remote control from the ignition lock

Parking brake

The concept Your BMW is equipped with an electromechan- ical parking brake that is set and released with a button. The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked.

With the engine stopped, the parking brake acts on the rear wheels via an electromechanical system. When the engine is running, the park- ing brake acts on the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the brake hydraulics.

D ri

vi n

g

58

Setting

Pull button. The parking brake is set.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

The remote control does not have to be inserted into the ignition lock for the parking brake to be set.

While driving If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to set the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, pull on the button longer. The vehicle continues to brake forcefully for as long as you pull on the button.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up red, a chime sounds and the brake lamps light up.

Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

As soon as you brake the vehicle almost to a stop, i.e., down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/ 3 km/h or below, the parking brake remains set.

Releasing

With engine running

Press the button with the brake depressed.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

With engine switched off Press the button with the brake depressed.

This function is useful, for example, in auto- matic car washes, refer to pages 36, 124.

When leaving the vehicle, take the remote control with you; this precaution prevents

children from releasing the parking brake, etc.<

Parking brake malfunction In case of a failure of or fault in the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling if you leave the vehicle.

Releasing parking brake manually In the event of an electrical power loss or elec- trical malfunction, you can release the parking brake manually.

Before manually releasing the parking brake and each time you park the vehicle

without setting the parking brake, make sure that the automatic transmission is in position P, refer to page 60. Be sure to pay attention to the information in the instrument cluster. In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a chock. Otherwise there is a danger

C o

n tr

o ls

59

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

that the vehicle could roll if parked on a steep slope.<

If it becomes necessary to also release the transmission lock of the automatic transmission manually, follow this sequence:

1. If necessary, start by releasing the parking brake manually.

2. Then release the automatic transmission's transmission lock manually, refer to page 61.

Information on jump starting and towing from page 237.

Releasing 1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo

bay.

2. Remove the first-aid kit* and the warning triangle* if necessary.

3. Insert the releasing tool, contained in the onboard tool kit under the floor panel, refer to page 228, at the releasing point.

4. Firmly pull the releasing tool upward against the mechanical resistance, refer to arrow, until a considerable increase in force is felt and the parking brake is then clearly heard to release.

5. Stow the releasing tool, warning triangle* and first-aid kit* and close the left side panel in the cargo bay.

Only have a malfunction corrected by the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle

Center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel. If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation.<

Following manual release, the actual sta- tus of the parking brake may deviate from

that displayed by the indicator lamp.<

Operation after interruptions in power supply

The parking brake can only be used again if it was manually released due to an inter-

ruption in the supply of electrical power. Other- wise the operation of the parking brake is not ensured and there is a danger of the vehicle roll- ing despite the parking brake being set.<

Procedure 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the button with the brake depressed.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again.

Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

Any noises which occur are normal. Start-up may take several seconds.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 61.

Transmission positions P R N D M/S +

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, main-

tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.<

D ri

vi n

g

60

Displays in instrument cluster

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The transmission position is indicated, and in the manual mode, the gear currently engaged.

Engaging transmission position > You can only engage transmission posi-

tions D, R or N when the engine is running.

> With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise the shift command will not be executed.

> To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres- sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.

The engaged transmission position is displayed on the selector lever.

Engaging D, R or N Move the selector lever in the desired direction.

The selector lever immediately returns to the center position when released.

> N Neutral: Up to pressure point, arrow N.

> D Drive: Depending on the driving position, press

back up to the pressure point, arrow D, or beyond.

> R Reverse: Depending on the driving position, press forward up to the pressure point, arrow R, or beyond. Press the release button 1 at the same time.

Engaging P Press button P.

Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N; the shift command will not be executed unless the brake is applied.

Also observe the additional information on the automatic transmission.

R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts into transmission position R. To deactivate the interlock, press the release button 1.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

P is engaged automatically as soon as you switch off the engine unless N is

engaged and on vehicles with comfort access the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock, refer to page 56.<

Engaging N, D or R With transmission position P engaged, an inter- lock prevents accidentally shifting into trans- mission positions N, D and R. To deactivate the interlock, press the release button 1.

N Neutral Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car washes. The vehicle can roll.

N remains engaged even after the engine is switched off whenever you leave the

remote control in the ignition lock. This function is used, for example, in a car wash, refer to page 57. After approx. 30 minutes P is auto- matically engaged.<

C o

n tr

o ls

61

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are available. Under normal operating conditions, the fuel consumption is lowest when driving in posi- tion D.

Kick-down The kick-down mode provides maximum accel- eration. Depress the accelerator pedal past the increased resistance point at the full-throttle position.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Move selector lever from transmission posi- tion D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot: The selector lever remains in the M/S shifting slot, the sport program is activated and DS is shown in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driv- ing style.

When the selector lever is pressed forward or back, the manual mode is activated and the Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument clus- ter shows M1 through M6.

> Press selector lever forward: The transmission downshifts.

> Press selector lever back: The transmission upshifts.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru- ment cluster, followed by the current gear.

To use the automatic function again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

If transmission position P is engaged, the selector lever automatically returns to the

center position of the automatic slot.<

Manually releasing transmission lock In case of a power failure, e.g. when the battery is drained or disconnected, or an

electrical malfunction, the transmission lock must be manually released, as otherwise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot be towed.<

When manually releasing the transmis- sion lock, depress the brake pedal, as

otherwise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling when the transmission lock is manually released.<

The transmission lock should only be released for towing. Reengage the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination.

If it also becomes necessary to manually release the parking brake, follow this sequence:

1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

2. Manually release the parking brake, refer to page 58.

3. Manually release the transmission lock of the automatic transmission.

Information on jump starting and towing from page 237.

Releasing 1. Slide back the cover of the cup holder and

remove the floor mat on the bar between the cup holders.

2. Open the cover in the bottom of the cup holder with the releasing tool.

D ri

vi n

g

62

3. Insert the releasing tool, contained in the onboard tool kit under the floor panel, refer to page 228, into the opening, arrow 1.

4. Turn the releasing tool as far as possible, arrow 2, and then press downward. The transmission lock is released.

Lock the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination. Otherwise

there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<

Locking

1. Pull out the releasing tool. The transmission lock is locked again.

2. Close the cover in the bottom of the cup holder and lay in the mat again.

3. Close the cover of the cup holder and stow the releasing tool.

The display in the instrument cluster must change from N to P after locking the

transmission lock. Otherwise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<

Information on jump starting and towing from page 237.

Turn signals/headlamp flasher/high beams

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signals

Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever up to the resistance point.

Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb

needs to be replaced.<

Signaling briefly Press lever to resistance point and hold for as long as you wish to signal.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever up to the resistance point; the turn signal flashes once.

You can switch over this function so that the turn signal flashes three times. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

C o

n tr

o ls

63

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the controller.

Triple turn signaling is activated.

Washer/wiper system

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps* 5 Adjusting rain sensorsensitivity level

Switching on wipers Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once. The system reverts to operation in the intermit- tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system reverts to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor* The wiper operation is controlled automatically as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sen- sor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but- ton lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level Turn the knurled wheel 5.

Deactivating rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash. Failure to

do so could result in damage caused by undes- ired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps* Pull the lever, arrow 4.

The system sprays washer fluid against the windshield and activates the wipers for a brief period.

When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the headlamps are simultaneously washed at appropriate intervals.

D ri

vi n

g

64

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do so, your vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles Both windshield washer nozzles are automati- cally heated with the engine running or the igni- tion switched on.

Rear window wiper

1 Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is engaged, continuous operation is switched on automatically

2 Cleaning the rear window

Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, other-

wise you will damage the washer pump.<

Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Always keep it well away from sparks and

open flames, and store it in tightly closed con- tainers well out of the reach of children. Always observe the instructions for use provided on the containers.<

Washer fluid reservoir

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- voir.

Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.

In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix the washer fluid before filling.<

Capacity approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.

Cruise control*

The concept The cruise control with a braking function is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/ 30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you set using the lever mounted on the steering column. To keep the specified speed constant, the system brakes if the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade.

Do not use the cruise control under driv- ing conditions that do not permit a con-

stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.<

C o

n tr

o ls

65

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

One lever for all functions

1 Storing speed and maintaining or increas- ing

2 Storing speed and maintaining or decreas- ing

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Resuming stored setting

Maintaining current speed Briefly press, arrow 1, or briefly pull, arrow 2 lever.

The speed currently being driven is stored and maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades if the engine output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade, the system lightly brakes the vehicle.

Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever up to or beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is set.

> Each time the lever is pressed up to the resistance point, the desired speed increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed increases by a maximum of 5 mph or 10 km/h.

The system stores the setting and maintains the set speed.

Accelerating with lever Accelerate slightly:

Press the lever up to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Accelerate more rapidly:

Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores the setting and maintains the set speed.

Reducing desired speed Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis- tance point, the desired speed decreases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.

The system stores the setting and maintains the set speed.

If the speed is to be considerably reduced, depress the brake, as otherwise

a dangerous situation could result due to insuf- ficient deceleration.<

Deactivating cruise control Briefly press the lever up or down, arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer go out.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:

> when braking

> when transmission position N is engaged

> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated

> when HDC is activated

> when DSC or ABS is active

Accelerating does not deactivate the cruise control. After releasing the accelerator pedal,

D ri

vi n

g

66

the stored speed is reached and maintained again.

Warning lamp The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control has automatically been deactivated by braking with the park-

ing brake or by a control intervention by DSC. A message appears on the Control Display.

Resuming stored speed Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored speed is resumed and maintained.

In the following cases the stored speed value is deleted and can no longer be resumed:

> in case of an intervention of the driving sta- bility control systems

> when transmission position N is engaged

> when the ignition is switched off

Displays in instrument cluster

1 Stored desired speed

2 Selected desired speed appears briefly

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly in the instrument cluster, then con-

ditions required for operation may not currently be fulfilled. Retrieving Check Control messages, refer to page 74.<

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up if the sys- tem has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. Detailed informa-

tion is provided from page 74.

C o

n tr

o ls

67

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Everything under control

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 Button in instrument cluster

2 Outside temperature display and clock

3 Odometer and trip odometer

Button in instrument cluster > With ignition switched on

Press the button: Resetting trip odometer

Press the button for approx. 5 seconds: Displaying service requirements, refer to page 71

> With ignition switched off

Press the button: Briefly displaying time, outside temperature and odometer

Units of measure To set the corresponding unit of measure km or miles for the odometer and for the outside tem- perature 7 or 6, refer to page 79.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Time, date, outside temperature display From radio readiness the outside temperature and the time are displayed.

To set the time, refer to page 77.

Retrieving date

Press the button on turn signal lever upward; the date appears.

To set the date, refer to page 78.

Pressing the button upward or downward sev- eral times changes the display between clock and outside temperature display, date and Check Control messages, refer to page 75.

Outside temperature warning If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. There is an increased danger of ice.

Even at temperatures above +377/ +36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-

fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the shade, otherwise there is an increased accident risk.<

Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster with the ignition switched on.

When vehicle is parked To briefly display the time, outside temperature and mileage after the remote control has been removed from the ignition lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

68

Tachometer

Do not operate the engine with the needle in the red overspeed zone of the gauge, refer to arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display.

Checking coolant level, refer to page 225.

Energy Control

Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini- mum exhaust emissions.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 22.5 US gal/ 85 liters. You will find information on refueling on page 212.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve After the reserve quantity has been reached, a message briefly appears on the Control Display; the remaining range is shown in the computer. Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains on the Control Display.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

C o

n tr

o ls

69

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Computer

Displays in instrument cluster

To display the information, press the BC button on the turn signal lever.

The following information is displayed in the specified order:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is projected based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/ 30 km.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine stopped are not included in the calculations of average speed.

To reset average speed: press the BC button on the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the BC button on the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

For different routes You can display the average speed and average consumption for two different routes on the Control Display, refer to the following and to Trip computer*.

Displays on Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive. For explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- troller.

> Estimated time of arrival at destination and remaining distance:

> Entering a distance manually in the com- puter, see below.

> Entering a destination in the navigation system*, refer to page 131.

> Cruising range

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

70

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Resetting values You can reset the values for the average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. To confirm your selection, press the con- troller again.

Entering a distance manually 1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the

controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination.

3. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The distance is automatically preset during the destination guidance of the navigation sys- tem*.

Trip computer* The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a vacation trip.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con- troller.

> Departure time

> Driving time

> Distance traveled

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Starting or stopping the trip computer, or reset- ting all values:

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item.

3. Press the controller.

Display options You can display the computer or the trip com- puter in the assistance window.

1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Onboard info" or "Trip computer".

C o

n tr

o ls

71

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Press the controller.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date for the next maintenance are displayed briefly with the ignition switched on.

To determine the extent of maintenance required, you can also display the remaining distance or the service date individually in the instrument cluster.

1. Press the button in the instrument cluster for approx. 5 seconds until the service requirement is displayed.

2. Press the button repeatedly to display the individual service requirement points.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

72

Displaying service requirements

1 Button for selecting display

2 Service requirements

3 Engine oil

4 Legally mandated inspections* 5 Front brake pads

6 Rear brake pads

7 Brake fluid

The sequence of the displayed maintenance can vary. First the data for the next maintenance are displayed.

Additional information You can select a display of more detailed infor- mation on the maintenance scope on the Con- trol Display. For explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

73

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

6. Select "Status" and press the controller.

The display shows a list of selected service and maintenance procedures, as well as legally mandated inspections.

You can request more detailed information on every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally man- dated inspection is approaching. Please

arrange a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering dates for legally mandated inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 78; otherwise, the effec- tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Status" and press the controller.

7. Select "State inspection" and press the controller.

8. Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is highlighted.

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.

11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

12. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

74

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors functions in the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal- function in the monitored systems. This kind of Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster, and if necessary an acoustic signal and text messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.

means that a Check Control message has been generated. The symbol continues to be visible even when the Check Control message disappears after a short time. The warning lamps and text messages are stored and can be displayed later, also refer to page 75.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con- trol Display explain the meaning of the dis- played indicator and warning lamps.

You can display additional information on most Check Control messages later, e.g. on the cause of the malfunction and on corresponding need for action, see below.

In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor- mation is displayed immediately when the related lamp lights up.

Exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages remain visible until the malfunctions have been rectified. They

C o

n tr

o ls

75

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions occur simultaneously, they are displayed in succession.

Other messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

1. Press the button on the turn signal lever downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored Check Control messages appear in the dis- play. "CHECK OK" is shown if no messages are present. Check Control messages are accompanied by text messages on the Control Display.

2. Press the button to display additional mes- sages, or the time and outside temperature.

Displaying additional information later iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select a text message and press the con- troller.

To exit the display: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Indication of malfunction urgency

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the stored Check Control messages are also dis- played with the following symbols:

No malfunctions are present in the moni- tored systems.

Malfunctions are present in the moni- tored systems. Depending on the mal- function, supplementary information is shown on the Control Display.

The symbols also indicate the status of the ser- vice requirements display, refer to page 73.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

76

Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message indicates when you have reached this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing limit iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

5. Select the speed value and press the con- troller.

6. Turn the controller to set the limit.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The limit is automatically activated.

Applying your current speed as limit Select "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system applies your current speed as the limit.

Activating limit Select "On" and press the controller.

Limit is automatically activated.

Stopwatch iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- ler.

Starting, stopping or resetting > Select "Start" and press the controller.

The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

> Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it was running beforehand.

> Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.

Taking an intermediate time reading Select "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.

All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch

is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the background.<

C o

n tr

o ls

77

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Settings on Control Display iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

Setting time 1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is

selected and press the controller.

2. Move the controller once to the front if nec- essary to change to the first field from the top.

3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

The changed time is stored.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

78

Switching on hour signal* You will hear three tones just before each full hour.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. The hour signal is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting time format 1. Select "Time format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting date 1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is

selected and press the controller.

2. Select "Date" and press the controller.

3. Select "Set date" and press the controller. The first section of the date display is high- lighted, in this case the month.

4. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

5. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.

6. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.

Changing date format 1. Select "Date format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Brightness of Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.

1. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

2. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the right to select "Display".

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

C o

n tr

o ls

79

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Units of measure You can change the units of measure for con- sumption, distances, temperature and pres- sure.

1. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.

2. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Units" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select the menu item to be set and press the controller.

4. Select the desired unit of measure and press the controller.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Language on Control Display 1. Select "Language / Units" and press the

controller.

2. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Text language" and press the con- troller. You can change the language of the text displays.

4. Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Volume of warning tones* On vehicles equipped with a single drive, you can increase or decrease the volume of the warning tones, e.g. for the safety belt reminder, compared to the entertainment sound output. The warning tones have a specified minimum and maximum volume that cannot be dropped below or exceeded.

1. Select "Tone / volume" and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Volume settings" and press the controller.

3. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Select "Warning tones" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, change to the right-hand field and turn the controller. The setting is applied.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

80

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The concept The PDC assists you when you are parking. Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert you to the approach of an object from behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper. The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning first sounds for the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor- ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth- erwise the physical circumstances would mean that the system warning was too late.<

Automatic activation Whenever the engine is running or the ignition is on, each time you move the selector lever into position R, the PDC system is activated after approx.1 second.

Wait this short period before driving off.

Manual activation

Press the button, the LED lights up.

Manual deactivation Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Automatic deactivation After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is switched off and the LED goes out. You can reactivate the system manually as needed.

Warning tones When nearing an object, the position is corre- spondingly indicated by an interval tone. As a result, an object detected, for example, to the left rear of the vehicle will be indicated by a warning tone from the left rear speaker. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

> if you remain in front of an object that was only detected by one of the corner sensors

> if you drive parallel to a wall

Adjusting You can adjust the volume of the warning tones if the vehicle is equipped with a single drive, refer to page 79.

Malfunction The LED in the button flashes and a message appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal- functioning. Have the system checked.

To prevent this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean- ers for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm to them.

C o

n tr

o ls

81

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

PDC with visual warning* You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already shown there before a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

If the vehicle is equipped with a backup camera, refer to the display of the backup camera on page 83.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "PDC" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con- troller.

The PDC screen is activated.

The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limits Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system's detection of objects is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measure- ment, such as those encountered with tow bars

and trailer couplings, thin or wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects already displayed, e.g. a curb, can also disappear from the detection area of the sensors again before or after a con- tinuous tone already sounds. Higher, protrud- ing objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<

Backup camera*

The concept The backup camera in the liftgate displays the area behind your vehicle on the Control Display.

Also check the traffic situation around the vehicle during parking and maneuvering

with direct vision, as otherwise danger of an accident could result, for example, from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup camera.<

Switching on

Automatically Engage transmission position R with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Manually

Press the button. PDC is activated at the same time, refer to page 80.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

82

Switching off

Automatically When driving forward from a speed of approx. 12 mph/20 km/h or from a driven distance of approx. 164 ft/50 m.

Manually Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Driver assistance functions The following functions can improve the effect of the backup camera depending on the situa- tion.

They can only be activated when the tailgates are completely closed.

Lane lines The lane lines are shown in the picture of the backup camera. They help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

To estimate the space required, turn the steer- ing wheel so that the lane lines guide into the parking space or the maneuvering area you have chosen.

The lane lines are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines The static turning circle lines are displayed in the picture of the backup camera and show you the course of the smallest possible turning cir- cle on level roads.

Using lane and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir-

cle line guide within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel so that the lane lines cover the corresponding turning circle line.

This results in a steering wheel adjustment that makes full use of the smallest possible turning circle of the vehicle when parking.

Virtual camera pan The picture area is dependent on the current speed: At low speeds, the camera view is panned toward the street, and at higher speeds toward the horizon. This enables the currently relevant picture area to be shown enlarged on the Control Display.

To activate the virtual camera pan, select the camera view "Camera view: full screen".

Obstacle marking Spatially shaped markings are shown in the pic- ture of the backup camera. Their stepped col- ors correspond to the markings of the Park Dis- tance Control and support you in estimating the distance to the object shown.

The obstacle marking is deactivated when driv- ing in reverse from approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.

C o

n tr

o ls

83

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Activating driver assistance functions

With backup camera switched on iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the controller.

2. Select the desired function and press the controller.

With backup camera switched off 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Maneuvering aids" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

7. Select the desired functions and press the controller. You can also adjust the brightness of the camera view.

The settings are used for the remote control currently in use.

Displays You can display the picture of the backup cam- era in various ways. In addition, you can also display the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 81.

> "Camera view: full screen" The picture of the backup camera is shown on the entire Control Display.

> "Camera view: main window" The picture of the backup camera is shown in the main window of the Control Display.

> "PDC in main window only" PDC is shown in the main window of the Control Display.

Selecting displays 1. Select "Maneuvering aids" and press the

controller, refer to Activating functions.

2. Turn the controller until "View selection" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select the desired display and press the controller. The setting is used for the remote control currently in use.

Cleaning backup camera The lens of the backup camera is located in the liftgate over the license plate.

The picture quality of the backup camera may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens with a moist, non-abrasive cloth.

In case of frost, a heater in the lens is switched on automatically.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

84

Driving stability control systems Your BMW is equipped with an extended array of systems designed to enhance and maintain vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 123.

CBC Cornering Brake Control When braking during curves or when braking during a lane change, driving stability and steer- ing response are improved further.

Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

DBC Dynamic Brake Control When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro- vided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when starting off and accelerating. DSC also identifies unstable driving conditions, such as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or slid- ing of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions in the indi- vidual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin further by taking risks.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up, but not longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Trac- tion Control and DSC are deactivated together. Stabilizing interventions are now not carried out.

A message appears on the Control Display. Please note any supplementary information that appears there.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the button; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamps light up: DSC is deactivated.

C o

n tr

o ls

85

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow, sand or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains*

Activating DTC

Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

xDrive xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your X5. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC fur- ther optimize the traction and dynamic driving characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axle depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions.

HDC Hill Descent Control

The concept HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to maintain even better control of your BMW under these conditions. The vehicle moves at approximately walking speed without active intervention from the driver.

HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving down steep hills with a speed below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed automatically down to approximately walking speed, approx. 5 mph/8 km/h, and then main- tains this speed at a constant.

Only use HDC in transmission position D or R.

Increasing or reducing speed You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary this automatically controlled speed within a range extending from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h to 15 mph/25 km/h. You can specify a target speed within the same range by using the lever of the cruise control.

1 Increasing speed

2 Reducing speed

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

86

Activating HDC

Press the button; the LED lights up. The HDC display is shown in the instrument cluster.

The LED flashes when the brakes are applied automatically.

Deactivating HDC Press the button again. The LED and the HDC display go out.

HDC is also activated at speeds over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Displays in instrument cluster

1 Display for target speed

2 HDC display

Malfunction HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following situations due to a high brake temperature:

> The LED in the button and the display HDC go out during HDC operation.

> The LED in the button and the HDC display do not light up when the button is pressed.

Malfunction of driving stability control systems

When driving on poor roads, avoid using full throttle or pressing the accelerator

beyond the kick-down point and also avoid heavy braking. Otherwise, the drive train may be damaged or accidents can occur.<

Adaptive Drive*

The concept Adaptive Drive reduces undesirable vehicle movements that occur when driving on rough roads or with a dynamic driving style. Maximum driving comfort and driving dynamics are achieved in this way.

Chassis and suspension tuning You can choose between two types of chassis and suspension tuning.

> Normal: The comfortable chassis and suspension tuning setting offers optimum comfort when traveling.

> Sport: The sportier chassis and suspension tuning setting offers increased vehicle agility.

Selecting chassis and suspension tuning

Press the button. The system switches between the two chassis and suspension tuning settings.

> Sport: The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

C o

n tr

o ls

87

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> Normal: The LED in the button goes out.

The selection of the chassis and suspension tuning setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Self-leveling suspension*

Malfunction The warning lamp for self-leveling suspension lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Control

Display. A malfunction has occurred in the self- leveling suspension. Stop and check the vehi- cle. If it is considerably lower at the rear than at the front, and possibly also on one side rear left compared to rear right , proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Drive with appropriate caution in the meantime. The vehicle has reduced ground clearance and driving comfort may be notice- ably reduced. Even if the orientation of the vehi- cle is normal, when a malfunction is indicated on the display, you should proceed to the near- est BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW guide- lines and uses appropriately trained personnel.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor*

The concept The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the infla- tion pressures in the tires as you drive. The sys- tem provides an alert whenever the inflation pressure drops significantly in relation to the pressure in another tire.

In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels change. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.

The initialization must be repeated after each time the tire inflation pressure is cor-

rected and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden severe tire damage caused by

outside factors and does not detect a natural, even pressure drop in all four tires.<

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Driving with snow chains* When you are driving with the compact wheel* the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.

Initializing system The initialization finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically. Do not initialize the sys- tem when driving with snow chains* or with the compact wheel*.<

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

88

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the controller.

6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

8. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The message "resetting FTM " is displayed.

9. Start to drive.

The initialization finishes during driving. "Sta- tus:active" is displayed on the Control Display.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.

If you have deactivated DSC, it will be activated automatically.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In case of further air loss of the defective wheel, its position will be indicated to you on the Control Display.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run- flat tires as intended at the factory,

refer to page 220, do not continue driving. Continuing to drive with a flat tire could cause severe accidents.<

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:

> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 94 miles/150 km

> With a full load: 4 or more persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible, otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not con- tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<

C o

n tr

o ls

89

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*

The concept TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system reports when the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid- erably in one or several tires.

Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth- erwise fault-free operation of the system is not ensured.

Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

System limits TPM cannot announce sudden serious tire damage caused by external influ-

ences.<

The system does not function properly if it has not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite correct tire inflation pressures.

The system is inactive and cannot display a flat tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM electronics, e.g. a compact wheel*, or if TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency.

Status display on Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires.

TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure changes during driving into account. A correc- tion is only required if requested by TPM with the color.

Green The tire pressure matches the learned set state.

"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis- play.

One wheel is yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.

All wheels are yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.

Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire.

Reasons for this can be:

> TPM is being reset

> Temporary interference due to systems or devices which use the same radio fre- quency

> Malfunction

Resetting system Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

Resetting finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting is continued automatically. Do not reset the system when driving with a compact wheel*.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

90

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "TPM" is selected and press the controller.

6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

9. Start to drive. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla- tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur- ing driving. The tires are shown in green on the Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is dis- played.

If a flat tire is detected during resetting and applying the tire inflation pressures,

all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis- play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<

Message with low tire inflation pressure

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run- flat tires as intended at the factory,

refer to page 220, do not continue driving. Continuing to drive with a flat tire could cause severe accidents.<

2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:

> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km

> With a full load: 4 or more persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible, otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not con- tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. The tires are shown in gray on the Control Dis-

play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can be detected.

C o

n tr

o ls

91

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

A message like this is displayed in the following situations:

> In case of a malfunction: Have the system checked

> If a wheel without TPM electronics is mounted, e.g. a compact wheel*

> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency

Explanation according to the NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire, including the spare*, should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety fea- ture, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illumi- nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signif- icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- ping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres- sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Active steering*

The concept The active steering actively varies the steering angle of the front wheels in relation to the steer- ing wheel movements. In addition, it also varies the steering force required for steering depend- ing on the vehicle's speed.

When you are driving in the low road speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer- ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Con- trol Display. The active steering is no longer operational. At low speeds,

greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel move- ments. The stability-promoting intervention can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

92

Brake force display

The brake lamps light up in two stages depend- ing on how strongly you brake.

> Normal braking The brake lamps and the center brake lamp light up.

> Heavy breaking The brake lamps in the liftgate also light up.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Head airbags

3 Side airbags in backrests

Protective action To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on page 40.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint system from the vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the wiring or the individual components in the air- bag system. This category includes the uphol- stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the doors and the roof pillars along with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been trig- gered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air- bag generators executed only by a BMW Sports

C o

n tr

o ls

93

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Unprofes- sional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired air- bag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warnings and information on the airbags is also provided on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags The occupation of the seat is detected by eval- uating the impression on the occupied seat sur- face of the front passenger seat. The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly by the sys- tem.

The current status of the front passenger airbags, i.e. deactivated or activated, is

indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front passenger airbags in the following.<

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, observe the safety infor-

mation and handling instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 52. The front and side airbags on the front passen- ger side can be deactivated for teenagers and adults in certain sitting positions; then the indi- cator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In these cases, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are acti- vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be produced by changing the sitting position, transport the correspond- ing person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat cov- ers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items onto the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not lay objects under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor- rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<

Operating state of front passenger airbags

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags indicates the operating status of the front and side airbags on the front passenger side depending on the seat occupation. The indica- tor lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a child restraint system intended for the purpose is properly detected on the seat. The front and side airbags on the front pas- senger side are not activated.

> The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient height is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags on the front pas- senger side are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not light up when the seat is empty. However, the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

94

Operational readiness of airbag system

From radio readiness, refer to page 56, the warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag sys- tem and the safety belt tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up from radio

readiness.

> Warning lamp lights up continuously.

Have the airbag system checked immedi- ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise

there is a danger that the airbag system may not respond in the expected manner in an accident despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

Head-Up Display*

The concept With the Head-Up Display important informa- tion is projected into the driver's field of view, e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to take in this information without looking away from the road.

Switching on/off Press the button.

1 Navigation information or Check Control messages

2 Cruise control

3 Speed

Selecting displays iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

95

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.

6. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.

7. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis- play.

8. Press the controller. The information is shown on the Head-

Up Display.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adjusting brightness and height of display The brightness of the display is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the base setting. With the low beams switched on, the brightness can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of the instrument lighting.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.

6. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Brightness / Posi- tion" is selected and press the controller.

7. If necessary, move the controller to the left or right to select "Brightness" or "Picture position".

8. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Notes The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis- play is influenced by:

> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters

> Certain sitting positions

> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis- play

> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting conditions

If the image is distorted, have the basic setting checked at a BMW Sport Activity Vehicle Cen- ter.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield complies with the require- ments of the Head-Up Display to enable a pre- cise display. A film in the windshield prevents the double images from being displayed. Windshield replacement should be carried out by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

96

Care instructions You can find everything you need to know on this topic by consulting the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.

Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis- play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a

display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may result.<

C o

n tr

o ls

97

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lights off and daytime running lamps* 1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps* 2 Low beams and courtesy lamps

3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run- ning lamps*, courtesy lamps, Adaptive Head Light*

Parking lamps In position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

The parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for long peri-

ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos- sible to start the engine. It is better to switch on the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to page 99.<

Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

If the light switch remains in position 2, the exterior lamps are switched off automatically when the driver's door is opened while the igni- tion is off.

Switch on the parking lamps if required as described under Parking lamps.

Automatic headlamp control* With the daytime running lamps activated, refer to page 98, the daytime running lamps are switched on in position 3 with the ignition switched on. The system automatically switches over to the low beams depending on the ambient light, e.g. in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk and in case of precipitation. The LED next to the symbol lights up when the low beams are on.

When driving into a tunnel with bright overhead lighting, switching on of the lights may be delayed. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams remain switched on inde- pendent of the ambient lighting condi-

tions when you switch on the fog lamps*.<

If desired, the light switch can be left in position 3. The exterior lighting is automatically switched off after parking the vehicle.

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low beams manually under these conditions.<

Courtesy lamps If, when parking the vehicle, you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up for a certain time when the vehicle is unlocked.

Pathway lighting When you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps, the low beams will come on for a brief period. You can set the duration or deactivate the func- tion via iDrive.

L am

p s

98

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to select the desired duration.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Daytime running lamps* The daytime running lamps light up in the posi- tion lights off, parking lamps or automatic head- lamp control. They have a lower light output than the low beams.

If desired, the light switch can be left in posi- tion 3. The exterior lighting is automatically switched off after parking the vehicle. If the light switch remains in the parking lamp position, the parking lamps light up after the ignition is switched off.

Switch on the parking lamps if required as described under Parking lamps.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps* iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press the controller.

Daytime running lamps are switched on. The setting is used for the remote control currently in use.

Adaptive Head Light*

The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

Turning lamps In tight curves, e.g. serpentines, or when turn- ing, one of the two front fog lamps is also switched on up to a speed of approx. 45 mph/ 70 km/h. This provides improved illumination of the area inside the curve.

C o

n tr

o ls

99

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Activating Adaptive Head Light and turning lamps Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 97. The Adaptive Head Light and the turning lamps are active. The automatic headlamp controlis switched on.

To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic, the Adap- tive Head Light is not active when driving in reverse and points toward the passenger side when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamps are active on both sides.

Malfunction The LED next to the symbol for automatic head- lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/ roadside parking lamps

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right* You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one side of your vehicle when parking.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Do not leave them switched on for

long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine.<

Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction up to the resistance point, arrow 3.

Fog lamps*

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting

You can control the lighting intensity by using the knurled wheel.

L am

p s

100

Interior lamps The interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry lightingand courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.

With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located in the door handles to illuminate the exterior area before the doors.

To protect the battery, all lamps in the vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-

utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 56.<

Switching interior lamps on and off manually

Press the button.

If you want the interior lamps to remain off con- tinuously, maintain pressure on the button for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

Reading lamps are provided in the front and rear* adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the button to switch the lamps on and off.

C o

n tr

o ls

101

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Climate

1 Air toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air for the upper body region, refer to Front ventilation on page 105

3 Air to footwell

4 Automatic climate control

C lim

at e

102

Automatic climate control

1 Seat heating* and ventilation*, driver's side 47

2 Temperature, left side of passenger com- partment

3 AUTO program

4 Temperature, right side of passenger com- partment

5 Maximum cooling

6 Seat heating* and ventilation*, front pas- senger side 47

7 Manual air distribution, front passenger side

8 Switching cooling function on and off man- ually

9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode

10 Manual air volume and residual heat utiliza- tion

11 Rear window defroster

12 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation

13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed

14 Manual air distribution, driver's side

The current setting for air distribution is dis- played on the Control Display.

A congenial climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis- tribution and air volume for virtually all condi- tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you only need to select an interior temperature pleasant to you.

The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile settings on page 29.

AUTO program The AUTO program handles the adjustment of air distribution to the windshield and side windows, in the direction of the upper body, and in the footwell, as well as the

air volume. It also adapts your instructions for

the temperature to outside influences through- out the year.

The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. At the same time, a con- densation sensor controls the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possible.

Intensity of AUTO program You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro- gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button. The respective current setting is displayed when the button on the display of the automatic climate control is pressed.

You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

C o

n tr

o ls

103

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired intensity and press the controller.

The marked intensity of the automatic program is switched on.

Temperature Set the desired temperature indi- vidually on the driver's and front passenger side.

The automatic climate control adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi- mum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.

When switching between different tem- perature settings in rapid succession, the

automatic climate control does not have suffi- cient time to adjust the set temperature.<

Adjusting temperature The highest cooling output of the automatic cli- mate control is a temperature of 607/166 and the highest heating output at 847/286.

For cooling with the highest temperature setting, select an interior temperature of

837/27.56, as at 847/286 the automatic climate control operates with the highest heat- ing output.<

Adjusting temperature in upper body region 1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller.

4. Move the controller to select the field.

5. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera- ture.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Quickly remove ice and condensa- tion from the windshield and front side windows.

Rear window defroster The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a while.

Air volume, manual You can vary the air volume by pressing on the corresponding side. You can reactivate the auto-

matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.

Air distribution, manual You can route the air flow out into the vehicle interior with various programs.

Programs on driver's side:

> Upper body region

> Upper body region and footwell

C lim

at e

104

> Footwell

> Windows and footwell

> Individual program

Programs on front passenger side:

> Upper body region

> Upper body region and footwell

> Footwell

> Individual program

Selecting program Press the button repeatedly until the desired program is shown on

the display of the automatic climate control.

Individually adjusting air distribution The settings are stored in the individual pro- gram.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller. The driver's and front passenger side can be adjusted separately with the fields on the right or left side.

4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if necessary. Move the controller to the right or left repeatedly until the driver's or front passen- ger side is selected.

5. Select the desired field by moving the con- troller.

6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu- tion.

Driver's side:

1 Air toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air for the upper body

3 Air to footwell

Front passenger side:

4 Air for the upper body

5 Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual air distribution settings.<

The automatic mode for the air volume remains effective with manual air distribution.

Switching cooling function on and off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before also reheating it as

required, according to the temperature setting. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati- cally with the AUTO program. The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Maximum cooling Maximally cooled air is obtained as quickly as possible from an outside temperature above 327/06 and with the engine running.

The automatic climate control changes over to the lowest temperature and switches into the recirculated-air mode. The maximum air quan- tity only flows out of the vents for the upper body. Therefore, open these vents for maxi- mum cooling.

C o

n tr

o ls

105

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

You can respond to pollutants or unpleasant odors in the immediate environment by suspending the supply of outside air. The system

then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. During AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and con- trols the shut-off automatically.

By pressing the button repeatedly, you can request three operating modes:

> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

> Left LED on, AUC mode: the system detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off the supply as needed.

> Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off.

If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation

in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch it off while also increasing the air volume as required. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time, as the air qual- ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu- ously.<

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com- partment, e.g. while stopped at a

school to pick up a child.

Switching on residual heat utilization Pressing the right side switches on the residual heat utilization when the following conditions are met:

> up to 15 minutes after switching off the engine

> with the engine at operating temperature

> with sufficient battery voltage

> at an outside temperature below 777/ 256

REST appears on the display of the automatic climate control when the residual heat utiliza- tion is switched on.

From radio readiness the interior temperature, the air volume and the air distribution can be set.

If the conditions for the residual heat utili- zation are met, no display appears.<

Switching off residual heat utilization You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches off the residual heat utilization. REST disappears from the display of the auto- matic climate control.

Switching off automatic climate control You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches

off the automatic climate control. The air vol- ume, the heater and the cooling function are all switched off.

You can switch on the system again by pressing any button of the automatic climate control.

Front ventilation

1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close air vents

2 Levers to change the air vent direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the air vents, otherwise these could be cata-

pulted outwards and lead to injuries.<

C lim

at e

106

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the air vents to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance, if the interior has become too warm, etc.

Draft-free ventilation Set the air vents so that the air flows past you and is not directed straight at you.

Ventilation in rear

1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close air vents

2 Knurled wheel for adjusting the tempera- ture in the upper body region:

> Turn toward blue: colder

> Turn toward red: warmer

3 Levers to change the air vent direction

Heating and ventilation of 3rd row seats* The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in the storage tray area between the seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats.

1 Knurled wheel:

> Activating heating and distributing air in footwell: Turn toward front

> Distributing air in storage compartment area between seats: Turn toward rear

2 Button for switching on blower: LED lights up

The heating is not ready for operation without switching on the blower. After the

heating is switched off, the blower can be used to recirculate the air within the vehicle, e.g. at high temperatures. To do this, turn the knurled wheel 1 toward the rear and switch on the blower, button 2.<

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gas- eous pollutants from the outside air. This com- bined filter is changed during maintenance by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. You can select a display of more detailed infor- mation on the Control Display, refer to page 71.

C o

n tr

o ls

107

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Rear automatic climate control* The control unit of the rear automatic climate control is located in the center console in the rear. The following settings and operating modes can be selected and adjusted separately for the left and right rear seating area:

1 Temperature, left rear seating area

2 AUTO program

3 Display

4 Temperature, right rear seating area

5 Seat heating, right rear seat

6 Air volume, manual

7 Seat heating, left rear seat

The current setting for the temperature and the air volume is shown on the display 3.

Activating rear automatic climate control iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Rear climate control" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired settings and press the controller.

The rear automatic climate control is activated and the settings of the automatic climate control on the driver's side can be applied if necessary.

The rear automatic climate control is not ready for operation if the automatic cli-

mate control is switched off. When activating the function of the automatic climate control for defrosting the windows and removing conden- sation, the rear automatic climate control is also not ready for operation.<

AUTO program The AUTO program assumes the adjustment of the air distribution toward the upper body and in the footwell, as well as the air volume for you. It also adapts your instruc-

tions for the temperature to outside influences throughout the year.

Temperature Set the desired temperature indi- vidually on the left and right side.

The rear automatic climate control adjusts this temperature as quickly

as possible at any time of year, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.

When switching between different tem- perature settings in rapid succession, the

rear automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.<

C lim

at e

108

Air volume, manual You can vary the air volume by pressing on the corresponding side. You can reactivate the auto-

matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.

Switching off rear automatic climate control

You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches

off the rear automatic climate control. The air volume, the heater and the cooling function are all switched off.

The rear automatic climate control can also be switched off with iDrive. To switch

on the rear automatic climate control again, the system must first be reactivated, refer to Acti- vating rear automatic climate control.<

You can switch on the system again by pressing any button of the rear automatic climate control.

Rear ventilation

1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close air vents

2 Knurled wheels to adjust temperature in upper body region; can be adjusted sepa- rately for left and right:

> Turn toward blue: colder

> Turn toward red: warmer

3 Levers to change the air vent direction

1 Lever to change the air vent direction

2 Knurled wheel to smoothly open and close air vents

For information on the ventilation of the 3rd row seats, refer to page 106.

Parked car ventilation*

The concept The parked car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem- peratures.

It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any outside temperature.

You can set two different times for the system to start. The parked car ventilation can also be switched on and off directly. It remains switched on for 30 minutes.

Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current, you should refrain from acti- vating it twice in succession without allowing the battery to be recharged in normal operation between use.

The air emerges through the upper body region air vents in the instrument panel. Therefore, please open the air vents.

The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive.

Switching on and off directly iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

C o

n tr

o ls

109

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.

5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.

The parked car ventilation is switched on.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Activation time" and press the con- troller.

5. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

6. Select the time and press the controller.

The first time setting is highlighted.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.

9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating activation time Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.

The activation time is activated.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control lights up.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes when the parked car ventilation has switched on.

The parked car ventilation is only avail- able for activation within the next

24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

110

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control*

The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled accessories, such as door openers and house alarm sys- tems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched on, this programmed memory button 1 can be used to operate the respective feature. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 111.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the travel range of the device. Also, comply with the safety precautions of the original hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibility If you see this symbol on the packaging or in the manual supplied with the orig- inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to

assume that it is compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

Should you have additional questions, please contact your BMW Sports Activity

Vehicle Center or call: 1-800-355-3515. Information is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 56.

2. When starting operation for the first time: Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes. All stored programs are deleted.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 2 in/5 cm to 8 in/20 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys- tem of the original hand-held transmitter used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit button on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the inte- grated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance.

5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

C o

n tr

o ls

111

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device when the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on.

If the device cannot be used after repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short time and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates that the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. In the case of an alternating-code system, program the mem- ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the equipment to be set. You will find informa- tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza- tion. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

Should you have questions, please con- tact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle

Center.<

Deleting stored programs Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes: All stored programs are deleted.

Individual programs cannot be deleted.

Digital compass*

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display indicates the cardinal or intercardi- nal direction in which you are currently driving.

Operating principle You can run various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object, e.g. a ball-point pen etc. The following setting options are displayed consecutively, depending on how long the adjustment button is pressed:

> Press briefly: switch display on/off

> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left/right-hand drive vehicle

> 12 to 15 seconds: set language

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

112

Setting compass zones Set the respectively applicable compass zone in your vehicle so that the compass functions

properly, refer to the map of the world with compass zones below.

To set the compass zones, press the adjust- ment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The dis- play indicates the number of the currently set compass zone.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjusting button repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that applies to your current position is displayed.

The compass will be operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating digital compass In the following situations, the digital compass must be calibrated:

> The wrong cardinal direction appears on the display.

> The cardinal direction displayed does not change despite a change in the direction of travel.

> Not all cardinal directions are displayed.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal

objects or overhead power lines in the vicin- ity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Input the currently applicable compass zone.

3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to display C. Then drive in a complete circle at least once at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. If the calibration is successful, the display C is replaced with the points of the compass.

Setting right/left-hand drive vehicle Your digital compass is already set to right or left-hand drive vehicle to match your vehicle at the factory.

C o

n tr

o ls

113

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Setting language You can set the language of the display.

Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

The setting is automatically stored after approx. 10 seconds.

Roller sun blinds for rear side windows* Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook onto bracket.

With roller sun blinds attached, do not open the windows during travel. The

blinds may otherwise be damaged by the wind.<

Glove compartment

Opening

Press the button. The covers open upward and downward and the lighting in the glove com- partment switches on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

Closing Press one of the two covers closed; both covers are closed.

Center armrest A storage compartment is located under the armrest between the front seats and, depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for the mobile phone bracket or snap-in adapter. Also refer to page 188.

Opening cover

Press the button; the respective cover folds upward.

Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device, e.g. a CD or an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehicle loudspeakers, refer to page 171.

Rechargeable flashlight* The flashlight can remain plugged in continu- ously. Pull the flashlight out of the socket when needed.

To avoid possibly damaging the lamp, always ensure that it is switched off

before inserting it in the socket.<

Storage compartments There are other storage compartments in the doors as well as in the front and rear center con- sole*. Storage nets* are located on the backrests of the front seats.

Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects in the storage nets or the net, otherwise

there is an increased risk of injury in an acci- dent.<

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

114

Clothes hooks Clothes hooks are located near the grab han- dles in the rear.

When hanging clothing on the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's

vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks. If you do so, they could cause personal injury to occupants during braking or evasive maneu- vers.<

Cup holders Do not place containers made of glass in the cup holders. This would lead to an

increased risk of injury in the event of an acci- dent. Do not force unsuitable containers into the cup holders, as otherwise damage can result.<

Front

Slide back the cover.

Rear

Release the center armrest with the button in the lower section of the opening under the head restraint and then fold down the armrest.

Press the button; the cover folds forward.

On vehicles with 3rd row seats* Fold down the center armrest.

Press the button; the cup holders are opened.

3rd row seats* The cup holders are located in the center con- sole between the seats.

Ashtray

Front

To open the cover, slide it forward.

C o

n tr

o ls

115

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Press the button. The ashtray insert raises slightly and can be removed.

Rear

To empty, press open the cover completely. The ashtray rises and can be removed.

Lighter

Front

Press in the lighter with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns.

Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Rear

Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.

Connecting electrical devices

Sockets With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the socket due to inserting plugs of different shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power outlets in the vehicle.

In cargo bay

Access to socket: Fold open the cover.

In storage compartment under center armrest Access to socket*: Pull off the cover.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

116

Cargo bay

Roll-up cover

Pull out the roll-up cover and hook it into the brackets.

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the roll-up cover. If you do so, they may

already pose a danger to vehicle occupants dur- ing braking or evasive maneuvers. Do not allow the roll-up cover to snap back, oth- erwise it can be damaged.<

Removing 1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.

2. Swing the case somewhat to the left, arrow 2, and remove.

Installing When installing, proceed in the opposite order of removal.

1. Lay on the case on the left-hand side and push it forward, arrow 1.

2. Swing the case toward the inside, refer to arrow 2.

3. Push the case forward at the ends until it engages in the two side brackets.

4. Check whether the case is properly locked in place by pulling it with a sudden move- ment.

Separation net*

Hooking in separation net Pull the separation net out of the case by the loop. Grasp the rod on both sides and insert it in the brackets, arrow 1. This is best carried out from the rear seat.

Letting down separation net When you no longer require the separation net, grasp the rod on both sides and remove it from the brackets, arrow 2. Then slowly allow the separation net to glide into the case.

C o

n tr

o ls

117

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Do not allow the separation net to snap back, otherwise there is a risk of injury

and the separation net may be damaged.<

Expanding cargo bay The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold down both sides separately in order to expand the cargo bay.

Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.

When you fold back the backrest, be sure that the catch engages securely. The red

warning indicator disappears in the recess when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or eva- sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu- pants.<

To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the safety belt information on page 40.<

Storage compartments in cargo bay Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- lowing storage compartments are provided in the cargo bay.

> Storage compartments behind the remov- able side panels in the cargo bay on the right and left, and under the floor panel flap.

> Storage tray* under the floor panel flap, capacity approx. 21 US gal/80 liters.

> Retaining straps* on the left and right side panel for securing small objects.

> Hooks*, e.g. for hanging up shopping bags or carrier bags on the left and right in the cargo bay.

> Net* on the left side panel of the cargo bay for smaller objects.

> Lashing rail with lashing eyes*. You can secure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lash- ing eyes. They can be removed at the notches in the rails. To move the lashing eyes, press the button.

Read and comply with the information enclosed with the heavy-duty cargo

straps.<

Floor panel flap

To access the onboard toolkit etc.

To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer to arrow.

Depending on the model, the floor panel flap can be locked*.

Adaptive fixing system* The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up the cargo bay. It consists of two brackets with a telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are guided into the two rails on the cargo bay floor.

Before using the adaptive fixing system, fold up and engage the backrest of the

2nd or 3rd* row seats and hook in the partition net*, as otherwise the cargo can be thrown around in the vehicle interior in an accident.<

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

118

1 Brackets

2 Telescopic rail

3 Notch in the cargo bay rail

Mounting brackets The two brackets are connected with a tele- scopic rail.

1. Mount the bracket in the respective notch of the rail on the cargo bay floor.

2. Press down the bracket to push it into the desired position.

3. Check the firm seating of the brackets. They must be clearly heard to engage.

Dividing up cargo bay

You can position the cargo as follows:

> between the rear backrest and the tele- scopic rail

> between the telescopic rail and the retain- ing strap

Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and retaining strap:

1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the retaining strap around the cargo, arrow 2.

2. Hook the retaining strap in the mounts 3 on the telescopic rail.

3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1. The retaining strap is tensioned.

You can also hook both retaining straps into each other.<

Removing brackets Press down the bracket and slide it up to the notches of the rails. Then remove the brackets.

Ski bag* Designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/2.10 m in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend to con- tract, reducing its overall capacity.

Before loading the ski bag, fold in the dis- play screen of the DVD system in the

rear*, as otherwise the display screen could be damaged.<

Loading 1. Fold down the center armrest, press the

button and open the cover.

2. Press the button again; the cover in the cargo bay opens. If you press the button firmly the first time, this cover also opens.

3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the stowed items and drying of the ski bag.

C o

n tr

o ls

119

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining strap into the center safety belt buckle that is marked CENTER.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten- sioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to do so, it could endanger occupants dur-

ing braking or evasive maneuvers.<

To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Removing ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to put it to other uses.

1. Pull the handle toward the front, arrow 1.

2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.

3. Close the cover in the cargo bay.

Details on various inserts are available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle

Center.<

Driving tips This section is designed to provide you

with extra support by supplying information useful in dealing with specific driving

and operating conditions.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

122

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin- ues to provide optimized economy of operation throughout an extended service life, we request that you devote careful attention to the follow- ing section.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at changing engine and vehicle speeds, however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode during these initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during this break-in period.

Following part replacement Observe the break-in instructions again if com- ponents mentioned above must be replaced after subsequent driving operation.

General driving notes

Closing liftgate/tailgate Operate the vehicle only when the tail- gate and liftgate are completely closed.

Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter into the passenger compartment.<

However, if special circumstances should make it absolutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the liftgate/tailgate open:

1. Close all windows and the panorama glass sunroof.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic climate control to a high level, refer to page 103.

Hot exhaust system As in all vehicles, extremely high temper- atures are generated on the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious property damage as well as personal injury. Do not touch hot tailpipes, as otherwise there is a danger of burns.<

Mobile communications devices in vehicle

BMW discourages the use of mobile communications devices, e.g. mobile

phones, inside the vehicle without a direct con- nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication device can influence one another. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation which results from transmission will be dissipated from the vehicle interior.<

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

123

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing, and is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Mini- mum tread depth on page 219.

Driving through water Do not drive through water on the road if it is deeper than 20 in/50 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Starting assistant The starting assistant enables you to start off conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is not required for this purpose.

1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.

2. Release the footbrake and immediately drive off quickly.

The starting assistant holds the vehicle for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the

footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle may also roll back slightly during this time. After releasing the footbrake, immediately start quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and it begins to roll back.<

Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. In situations that require it, it is best to brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent

pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

The braking effect of the engine can be further increased by downshifting in the manual mode of the automatic transmission, if necessary into first gear, refer to page 61. This prevents an excessive strain on the brakes.

Do not drive in idle or with the engine stopped, otherwise there will be no

engine braking action or support of the braking force and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area of movement of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

124

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When vehicle is parked Condensation forms in the automatic climate control system during operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car wash Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 48, otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle.

General information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

Rear window wiper The rear window wiper can be damaged in car washes. Take appropriate protective measures; ask the car wash operator if necessary.

With comfort access* Insert the remote control into the ignition lock. The engine can be switched off in transmission position N. Also refer to page 36.

Loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

YYY lbs. or XXX kg. Otherwise, this could damage the vehicle and produce unstable vehicle operating conditions.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from YYY lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

125

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low as possible, placing it directly behind the backrest.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge of the backrest.

> Use the separation net to protect the occu- pants, refer to page 116. Make sure that objects cannot penetrate through the sepa- ration net. Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects which could strike the rear window while driving.

Securing cargo > Use the luggage net*, retaining straps*, or

securing straps to hold down small and lightweight luggage and cargo.

> For larger and heavier pieces, heavy-duty cargo straps* are available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Four lashing eyes mounted in the cargo bay are used to secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer to illustration.

> Please observe the special instructions supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary. Use only the lashing eyes to secure heavy-duty cargo straps, refer to illustration, otherwise the cargo straps could become detached or the vehicle could be damaged. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 244, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. You should never transport unsecured heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment, as they could fly around and pose a safety hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak- ing or evasive maneuvers.<

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

126

Roof-mounted luggage rack* A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Please comply with the precau- tions included with the installation instructions.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on its handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the specified weights under Weights on page 244.

The load on the roof must be evenly distributed and must not extend outward beyond the limits of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest pieces on the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the pan- orama glass sunroof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the liftgate.

Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on poor roads Your X5 is at home on all roads and surfaces. It combines a 4-wheel drive system with the advantages of a normal passenger car.

Driving on unpaved terrain can cause damage to the vehicle.<

When you are driving on poor roads, there are a few points which you should strictly observe for your own safety, for that of your passengers, and for the safety of the vehicle:

> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving off and avoid taking risks at all costs.

> Adapt your driving speed to the road condi- tions. The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be.

> You can operate your vehicle on uphill and downhill gradients with a maximum slope of 50%. If you want to drive on uphill or down- hill gradients of this kind, make sure before- hand that the engine oil and coolant levels are near the MAX mark, refer to page 225.

> Use the HDC Hill Descent Control when driving down extremely steep grades, refer to page 85. It is possible to start off on grades of up to 33%. The permissible body roll is 50%.

> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these obstacles whenever possible.

> Please make sure that the undercarriage does not touch the ground, for example on crests and bumpy roads. The ground clear- ance of the vehicle is a maximum of approx. 8.0 in/20 cm. Please note that the ground clearance can vary depending on loading and the driving conditions of the vehicle.

> Only drive through water on roads up to a maximum depth of 20 in/50 cm and only at walking speed, making sure not to stop in the process.

> After driving through water at low speed, lightly press the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes and to prevent the braking effect from being reduced by wetness.

> Depending on the condition of the surface, it may be practical to briefly activate DTC, refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on page 85.

> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the driving stability control systems can distrib- ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.

Please note the following points after driving on poor roads to maintain the driving safety of your BMW:

> Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.

> Clean mud, snow, ice etc. from the wheels and tires and check the tires for damage.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

127

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation This chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you

reliably to your destination.

S ta

rt in

g n

av ig

at io

n sy

st em

130

Starting navigation system

Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi- gation DVD. The latest version is available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Inserting navigation DVD

Use the lower drive for navigation DVD.

1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up. The navigation DVD is automatically pulled in.

2. Allow several seconds for the system to scan the data from the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD 1. Press the button 1.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Display in assistance window You can display the route or the current position in the assistance window. This display remains visible even if you change to another applica- tion.

1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired route view or "Current position".

4. Press the controller.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

131

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from among the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Entering destination via voice*, refer to page 134

> Selecting destination using information, refer to page 137

> Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 138

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 139

> Selecting home address, refer to page 141

After selecting your destination you can pro- ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 143.

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.

Operating navigation system Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. If you do not observe this precau- tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.<

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation".

3. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

Entering a destination manually The system's word matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns/cities, refer to page 142. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller. "New destination" is selected.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

132

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.

The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of country and town/ city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Selecting country 1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed

country and press the controller.

The list of available countries appears on the display.

2. Select the country of destination and press the controller.

In order to be able to start the destination guid- ance, at least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered.

Entering destination via town/city name 1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/

city and press the controller.

2. Select the starting letter and press the con- troller. A list of all towns/cities starting with this let- ter appears on the Control Display.

3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:

> Delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.

> Delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller to the right to select

and hold down the controller.

4. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

> Enter blank space if necessary: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

133

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Change to the third field from the top if nec- essary. Turn the controller until the town or city name is selected from the list and press the controller.

Entering destination via zip code 1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-

ler.

2. Enter the zip code: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.

> Enter a blank space: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

> Delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.

> Delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller to the right to select

and hold down the controller.

3. Select the zip code and press the controller. The corresponding destination is displayed.

4. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

Entering street, house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec- tion or the house number.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and

press the controller.

2. Enter the street. The street is entered exactly like the desti- nation.

The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.

Entering a street without entering a town/city of destination You can also enter a street without entering a town/city of destination. In this case all streets of the entered country are offered for selection. The related town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can undo this entry. This may be practical if the desired street does not exist in the entered des- tination, because, for example, it belongs to another part of the town/city.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

134

1. Change to upper field. The arrow is selected.

2. Turn the controller to the right until the request for the entry of a street in the coun- try appears and press the controller.

3. Change to the second field from the top and enter the street.

Entering house number All house numbers stored for the street on the navigation DVD can be entered.

1. Select "House number" and press the con- troller.

2. Enter the house number: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.

3. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.

Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry

> Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller. Destination guidance starts immediately.

> If the destination guidance does not need to be started immediately: Select "Add to destination list" and press the controller. The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 138.

Entering destination via voice* You can enter a desired destination with the voice command system. When entering the destination, it is possible to change between voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti- vate the voice command system for this pur- pose if necessary.

With {Options} you can have the possible commands read aloud.<

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. {Enter address}

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

135

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Selecting country 1. Wait for the system to request the country

of destination.

Say the name of the country of destination in the language of the voice command system.

Entering destination The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.

Spelling destination To enter the destination, spell it using the orthography of the country of destination. Say the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

The system can suggest up to 20 desti- nations that match your entries. Up to 6 entries are displayed at once on the Con- trol Display.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

Entering the destination as an entire word* Destinations and streets in the same language area as the language of the voice command system can be spoken as an entire word.

Example: To enter a destination located in the US as an entire word, the language of the sys- tem must be English.

The condition for this is the use of a suitable navigation DVD.

Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

1. Wait for the system to request the destina- tion.

The system can suggest up to 6 destina- tions that match your entries.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

2. Say the name of the country of destina- tion.

1. Spell town/city name: Say at least the first three letters of the destination. The more letters you say, the more exactly the system recognizes the town/city.

A destination is suggested by the system.

2. Select city/town:

> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}

> Select other city/town: {No}

> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> Display additional entries of the list: {Next page}

> Spell the city/town again: {Repeat}

2. Say the name of the destination.

A destination is suggested by the system.

3. Select city/town:

> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}

> Select other city/town: {No}

> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> Enter city/town again: {Repeat}

> Enter destination by spelling it: {Spell}

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

136

Destinations that sound the same which cannot be differentiated by the system

are summarized in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots. Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then select the desired city/town in this list.<

Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the destination.

To enter the house number:

Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered. Say the house number as individual numbers.

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Saving destination The destination is added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.

Selecting destination via map If you only know the location of the town/city or street of the destination, then you can enter the destination by using a map. You can use the cursor to select the destination on the map and then apply it in the destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler. "New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

A section of a map is displayed on the Con- trol Display:

> During destination guidance, around the current destination

> With the destination guidance deacti- vated, around the last destination entered

4. Select destination with cursor.

> Changing scale: turn the controller.

> Moving map: move the controller in the corresponding direction. The controller can be moved to the left, right, forward, backward and also diago- nally.

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number.

{Start guidance}

{Add to destination} or {Add to address book}

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

137

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. To apply or store the destination in the des- tination guidance, press the controller. The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

> "Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.

> "Show current position" places the cur- rent position in the center of the map.

> "Show destination position" places the current destination in the center of the map.

> "Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".

> Exit the menu.

7. Press the controller.

The map for the destination entry can also be displayed in the map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using information You can obtain a display of selected destina- tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and apply them in the destination guidance.

1. Select "Information" and press the control- ler.

2. Select location:

> "On destination"

> "On location"

> "On a new destination"

3. Press the controller.

4. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res- taurants", and press the controller. These destinations are displayed on the Control Display.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

138

5. Select a destination and press the control- ler.

6. Select a menu item:

> To apply the address in the destination list and start the destination guidance: Select "Select as destination" and press the controller.

> To establish a telephone connection: Select "Call" and press the controller.

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination list The last 20 entered destinations are shown in the destination list. You can display these desti- nations and apply them in the destination guid- ance. For example, to plan a longer route, you can store all destinations you want to drive to in advance in the destination list, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 131.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The last destination entered is the first item in the destination list.

This symbol indicates the current destina- tion during destination guide.

To display additional destinations from the des- tination list: Turn the controller.

Applying destination in destination guidance 1. Select the desired destination and press

the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

Editing destination list 1. Select the desired destination in the desti-

nation list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

> Store entry: Select "Add to address book".

> Display information on destination: Select "Information on destination".

> Delete entry: Select "Delete entry".

> Delete all entries: Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.

> Change entry: Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination via town/city name, page 132.

3. Press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

139

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Address book

Opening address book iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address book You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con- troller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.

4. Enter name and address.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller. The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also store a destination from the desti- nation list into the address book, refer to page 138.

Storing current position* The current position can be applied in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New address" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller. The name given can be changed. For oper- ation, refer to Entering a destination manu- ally, page 131.

4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

You can also apply your current position in the address book if you have left the sector covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller. The stored entries appear on the Control Display.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

140

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

To start the destination guidance: Select "Start guidance" and press the control- ler.

Changing destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller.

4. Change entry. For operation, refer to Entering a destina- tion manually, page 131.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

Deleting individual destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Delete address" and press the con- troller.

Deleting all destinations from address book 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle and tires" and press the controller.

5. Select "Delete data" and press the control- ler.

6. Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

141

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Home address You can store your current position or the cur- rent destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.

Storing home address 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Home address" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or "Save current destination" during the desti- nation guidance, and press the controller.

4. With Professional navigation system: Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

Applying home address as destination 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

Changing home address 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 131.

Selecting route You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like while entering the destination and whenever the des- tination guidance is active.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.

Changing route criteria 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control Display.

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

> "With highways" Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority

> "Avoid highways" Highways are avoided where possible

> "Fast route" The short traveling time, being a combi- nation of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads

> "Short route" Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

142

4. Press the controller.

The route criterion is highlighted.

5. If necessary, select an additional route cri- terion and then press the controller:

> "Dynamic route" Automatic changing of the route in case of traffic obstructions. Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

> "Avoid tollroads" Tollroads are avoided where possible.

> "Avoid ferries" Ferries are avoided where possible.

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display.

1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller.

2. Select a route criterion and press the con- troller.

Word matching principle The system supports the word matching princi- ple to make it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns/cities. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The user benefits include:

> Names of specific locations can also vary from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another coun- try.

Example:

Instead of "Mnchen", you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

> When you are entering the names of towns/ cities and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough let- ters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.

> The system only accepts name entries beginning with letters that are stored on the navigation DVD. The system will not accept non existent names and addresses.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

143

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance

Via iDrive iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.

2. Select a destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new des- tination, refer to page 131.

3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

With programmable memory/direct selection buttons Press the ... button on which the desired destination is stored. Also refer to page 22.

After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis- play on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment via iDrive at any time. You will be punctually notified of a change of direction by spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrow.

Ending/continuing destination guidance

In arrow or map display

Select the symbol and press the controller.

In destination list This symbol indicates the current destina-

tion.

1. Select the current destination and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

144

When you park the vehicle before reaching the entered destination, the following question is displayed before beginning the next trip: "Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.

To start the destination guidance: Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Displaying route You have the option of displaying various views of the route during destination guidance.

From another menu, you can change directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items on page 18.<

Displaying arrow display 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is shown.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Selecting route criteria

3 Starting/ending destination guidance

4 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view

5 Distance to the next change of direction

6 Current position

7 Direction of travel

> Outline arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route

> Solid arrow: Arrow shows the route to be calculated from a bird's eye view when the vehicle is not located in an area contained on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a multi-level parking lot.

Depending on the equipment, the estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destina- tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.

Before a change in direction, the representation of the arrow changes.

1 Street name for change of direction

2 Distance up to change of direction

3 Change of direction

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

145

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying map view You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map view is selected:

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

3. Press the controller.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Starting/ending destination guidance

3 Selecting destination via map

4 Showing/hiding information last selected, refer to Selecting destination using infor- mation on page 137

5 Changing map display

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

6 Changing route criteria

7 Manually displaying traffic information* 8 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view

The estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destination are shown in the bottom line of the Control Display.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north, toward your current direction of travel, or show the map in perspective. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map always points toward north.

Changing map display

Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller. The next map display is displayed.

Changing scale Turn the controller to change the scale.

Displaying streets and towns/cities of route You can have the roads and towns/cities along the route displayed during destination guid- ance.

The distances remaining to be traveled on each individual road are also displayed.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

146

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination guidance via voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.

To switch the voice instructions on and off at any time:

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and press the controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.

Repeating and canceling voice instructions With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel you can also make the following settings, refer to page 50:

> Repeat the voice instruction: Press the button.

> Switch voice instructions on/off: Hold the button down.

Setting volume of voice instructions The volume can only be adjusted while a voice instruction is being output.

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces- sary.

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

147

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Changing route During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.

The route is recalculated.

To exit from the menu without changing the route:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Traffic information* In population centers you can display traffic information from radio stations that transmit information of the Traffic Info traffic warning service. This information of the traffic warning services is constantly updated using measuring data from traffic routing centers and information from traffic congestion indicators. During destination guidance the traffic informa- tion located near you on the route is automati- cally displayed. Regardless of whether the des- tination guidance is active, you can display the traffic information in the map view or in a list.

Switching reception of traffic information on/off iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info" is selected and press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

148

5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.

The traffic information can be transferred and displayed.

"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the strongest reception.

Depending on the station, either the sta- tion name, frequency, local number or

other information is displayed.<

Manually displaying traffic information

During destination guidance Traffic information can be displayed manually during destination guidance in the arrow or map view.

If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf- fic information is available for the planned route.

Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation on the planned route is marked with a yellow lozenge.

The current traffic information is shown on the Control Display sorted according to the dis- tance to the current vehicle position.

With destination guidance switched off 1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation".

3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.

The current traffic information is shown on the Control Display sorted according to the dis- tance to the current vehicle position.

Displaying detailed traffic information Select traffic information from the displayed list and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

149

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Depiction of traffic information in map view The traffic information symbols are shown in the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.

With a scale of up to 5 miles/10 km, additional information is displayed. The length, direction and effect of a traffic obstruction are indicated with arrows along the route, e.g.

Along planned route Yellow symbol with the traffic obstruction sym- bol.

Outside planned route > Map scale up to 5 miles/10 km:

White symbol with black or gray border with the traffic obstruction symbol

> Map scale from 10 miles/20 km: White symbol with black border with an arrow in the direction concerned

Traffic information during destination guidance The system behavior varies depending on whether "Dynamic route" is selected:

> "Dynamic route" is not selected: If a traffic obstruction is reported to the nav- igation system, you will be provided with certain information from a distance of approx. 25 miles/40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic congestion. The last possible junction will be displayed shortly before this.

> "Dynamic route" is selected: The route is automatically changed in case of traffic obstructions. Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

This information is also displayed if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Bypassing traffic congestion

Select "Detour" and press the controller. The navigation system determines a new route to bypass the traffic congestion.

Traffic event with map scales greater than 5 miles/10 km, arrow points in the direction of travel concerned

Several traffic events have been received. Select a smaller scale to display these individually.

Slow traffic or other traffic event

Traffic back up

Stopped traffic

Stopped traffic in both directions of travel

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

150

Symbols for traffic information Displaying current position You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Current position" is selected and press the controller.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can also have the current position dis- played on a map, refer to page 145.

Traffic light failure

Roadworks

General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load

Danger

Low clearance

No parking

Fog

Heavy rain

Slippery road

Cross winds

Smog

Road close

Slow traffic

Traffic back up

Stopped traffic

Icy roads

Uneven surface

Accident

Lane closure

Delay

Police checkpoint

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

151

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

What to do if

What to do if

> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc- tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con- trol Display? The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This infor- mation is indicated on the DVD label.

> you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- play? The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your position is not yet avail- able on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your posi- tion. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

> the destination guidance does not accept a destination? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name? On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guid- ance.

> you want to enter a destination for the des- tination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any let- ters to choose from. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec- tions? You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga- tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.

> the navigation system does not react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.

Entertainment Operation of the radio and CD as well as their

tone settings are described in this chapter.

O n

/O ff

a n

d s

et ti

n g

s

154

On/Off and settings

The following audio and video sources have common controls and adjustment options:

> Radio

> CD player

> CD changer*

Controls The audio and video sources can be operated with:

> Buttons in the area of the CD player

> iDrive

> Buttonson steering wheel, refer to page 11

> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21

Buttons on CD player

Equipment with a single drive

1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/off. When you switch on, the last set radio station or CD track is played.

> Turn: adjust volume.

2 Eject CD

3 Drive for audio CDs

4 Station scan/track search

> Change radio station.

> Select track for CD player and CD changer.

Equipment with two drives

1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/off. When you switch on, the last set radio station or CD track is played.

> Turn: adjust volume.

2 Drive for audio CDs

3 Eject CD

4 Station scan/track search

> Change radio station.

> Select track for CD player and CD changer.

5 Drive for navigation DVDs

Operation via iDrive iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

155

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

You have the following choices:

> "FM" and "AM": radio reception

> "WB": Weather Band station

> "SAT": satellite radio* > "CD": CD player or changer

> "AUX": external audio device

> "Set": depending on the audio source, other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sam- ple stations.

From another menu, you can change directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items on page 18.<

From radio readiness, the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching on/off To switch the Entertainment sound output on and off: Press knob 1 on the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indi- cates that sound output is switched off.

For equipment with a single drive, the sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition switched off. Switch on the sound output again for this pur- pose.

Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is set.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

From radio readiness, the setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass, or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once.

From radio readiness, the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing tone settings 1. button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" or "Tone / volume" and press the controller.

The tone settings can also be selected when you have opened "Entertainment" in the start menu: Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the controller.

Treble and bass 1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-

troller.

O n

/O ff

a n

d s

et ti

n g

s

156

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

Balance and fader You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control The speed-dependent volume control auto- matically increases the volume with increasing speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.

When equipped with two drives:

1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- troller.

2. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

If vehicle is equipped with a single drive:

1. Select "Volume settings" and press the controller.

2. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Select "Speed volume" and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

157

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Professional HiFi System* You can choose between stereo and multi- channel playback, surround.

1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.

2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".

3. Press the controller. The spatial sound effect is activated.

Equalizer* You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default settings.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Reset" is selected and press the controller.

6. When equipped with two drives: Select "Yes" and press the controller.

R ad

io

158

Radio

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.

Listening to radio

Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "FM" or "AM".

4. Press the controller.

Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre- sets".

If "Autostore" does not display any stations or if the stations displayed can no longer be received in the AM reception range, to update

the station with the strongest signal, refer to page 159.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

Buttons on CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system changes to the next displayed sta- tion. You can also change stations with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.

You can choose from the following selection criteria:

> "All stations": Stations that can currently be received in the "FM" waveband.

> "Autostore": The stations with the strongest received signals in the "AM" waveband.

> "Presets": Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 160.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

159

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

To change the selection criterion:

1. Change into the second field from the top.

2. Select the selection criterion and press the controller.

Sampling stations, scan The system automatically plays a brief sample from each of the stations on the current wave- band.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler. "Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

The stations are sampled.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the stations, and the radio remains on the current station.

Buttons on CD player To sample the stations, press and hold

the button for the corresponding direction.

To end scanning, press the button again.

Selecting frequency manually With "Manual" you can select stations that are received in addition to those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre- quency.

Updating stations with best reception If you are on a longer journey and leave the transmission range of the stations originally set, you can update the list of stations in the AM range with the best reception.

1. Select "AM" and press the controller.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

R ad

io

160

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.

Storing stations

Via iDrive 1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selec- tion criterion is selected and press the con- troller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station. "Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected.

7. Press the controller. The station is stored.

The stations of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

From radio readiness, the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

With programmable memory/direct selection buttons You can also store a station on the programma- ble memory/direct selection buttons, also refer to page 21.

1. Select a station.

2. ... Press and hold desired but- ton.

Changing a memory position 1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired station. "Set" is selected.

3. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

161

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected. The number of the memory position appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

6. Press the controller. The station is stored.

RDS Radio Data System RDS transmits additional information in the FM frequency range. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis- rupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off* 1. Select "FM" and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

RDS is activated.

Weather news flashes* Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce- anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) of the US Department of Trade. Weather news flashes are repeated every four to six minutes and are routinely updated at intervals of one to three hours, and more often when necessary. Most stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a storm, the National Weather Service inter- rupts the routine weather news and transmits special warning messages instead. If you have a question about NOAA Weather Radio, please contact the nearest office of the National Weather Service. Details are also provided on the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.

Calling up weather news flashes 1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

2. Select a station.

The station for weather news flashes may be unavailable in some regions.

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

162

Satellite radio

You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology the signal may fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

Enabling or disabling channels iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Select "SAT".

4. Press the controller.

The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled.

Enabling 1. Select a channel that has not yet been

enabled and press the controller. A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling.<

2. To enable the channels: Dial the phone number.

Disabling 1. Select an enabled channel and press the

controller.

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis- played.

The electronic serial number is required for disabling.<

3. To disable the channels: Dial the phone number.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

163

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Selecting and storing channel 1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

Channels are shown on the Control Display sorted on the basis of selection criteria.

2. Select a menu item:

> "Presets": Up to twelve channels you have stored previously.

> "All channels": All channels are displayed.

> "Categories": All channels, sorted by categories, e.g. news, jazz.

3. Press the controller.

4. If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category and press the controller.

The channels of this category are displayed.

5. Select a channel marked with this sym- bol.

6. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Additional information The name of the channel and additional infor- mation on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

1 Artist

2 Track

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

164

Storing channel 1. Select desired channel.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca- tion and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

Changing channel with buttons on CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system switches to the next enabled chan- nel.

Notes If no signal can be received for more than four seconds, a message is displayed on the Control Display.

Reception may not be possible for certain reasons, e.g. environmental influences or

topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this. The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to tall buildings, near trees, mountains or other sources of radio interference. Reception is usually possible again as soon as the signal is available again.<

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

165

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

When equipped with two drives: The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Compressed audio files CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.

Starting CD player

Inserting CD Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. The CD is automatically pulled in. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the data depending on the directory structure.

Via iDrive Starting playback when there is already a CD in the drive:

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "CD" and press the controller.

4. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. On vehicles with a CD changer, select "CD" and press the controller to start the CD player.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is switched on.

With programmable memory/direct selection buttons You can store the function CD player on the programmable memory/direct selection but- tons to start the CD player, refer to page 21.

*

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

166

Starting CD changer Filling CD changer, refer to page 169.

Via iDrive 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "CD" and press the controller.

4. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Select the desired CD and press the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD will be selected.

With programmable memory/direct selection buttons You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons to start the CD changer, refer to page 21.

Selecting a track

Buttons on CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track. The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive

Select a track by turning the controller.

Compressed audio files 1. Select the directory if necessary and press

the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

167

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

To change the directory: Select the directory and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

For equipment with two drives, you can store a certain track on the programmable memory/ direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.

Displaying information on track With compressed audio files, you can display any information stored on the current track, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information for the current track are dis- played.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Sampling tracks, scan The system automatically plays a brief sample from each of the tracks on the current CD.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the player remains on the current track.

Compressed audio files 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To sample all tracks of the current direc- tory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.

> To sample all tracks of the CD, select "Scan all" and press the controller.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

168

This cancels sampling, and the player remains on the current track.

Repeating a track 1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

To stop repeating:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.

> To repeat all tracks of the current direc- tory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

To stop repeating:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

Random play sequence In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are played once in a random sequence.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

To stop random function:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To play all tracks of the current directory in random order, select "Random direc- tory" and press the controller.

> To play all tracks of the CD in random order, select "Random all" and press the controller.

To stop random function:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

169

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Fast forward/reverse Buttons on CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction. The tracks can be listened to with some distor- tion.

CD changer

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in the glove compartment.

Controls and displays

1 LEDs on CD slot Flash when CD can be inserted.

2 Buttons for CD compartments LED lights up when CD compartment is filled.

Filling CD changer 1. Press the button.

The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.

2. Select another CD compartment if neces- sary: Press the ... button.

3. When the LEDs on the CD slot 1 flash, push in the CD.

Do not push in the CD until the LEDs on the CD slot 1 flash, as otherwise the CD

or the CD changer may be damaged.<

Filling empty CD compartments 1. Hold down the button.

The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.

2. Push in the CDs separately.

Do not push in the CD until the LEDs on the CD slot 1 flash, as otherwise the CD

or the CD changer may be damaged.<

The CDs are automatically stored in the com- partments.

Removing CDs from CD changer 1. Press the button.

2. Press the ... button to select the CD compartment. The CD is pushed out of the CD changer somewhat.

3. Remove the CD.

Removing all CDs from CD changer 1. Hold down the button.

The CDs are pushed out of the CD changer somewhat consecutively.

2. Remove the CDs.

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

170

Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles, as other- wise the CD/DVD or the adapter can jam and may no longer eject properly. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<

General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/ DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Avoiding damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois- ture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro- tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

Care If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from the center outward. For additional information on the care of CDs/DVDs, refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

171

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

External audio device

You can connect an external audio device, e.g. an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi- cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted via iDrive.

Connecting Fold up the center armrest.

Open the covers of the center armrest.

1 Power supply for your additional device: Socket with removable cap Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can use the cigarette lighter or the socket located in the rear.

2 Connection for audio playback: Jack plug in/3.5 mm

For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- ers, connect the headphone or Line-Out con- nection of the device to the connection 2.

Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.

Via iDrive iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Select "AUX" and press the controller.

4. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.

With programmable memory/direct selection buttons You can store the function external audio device on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

172

DVD system in rear

With the DVD system in the rear you can play CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image data. External audio and video devices can also be connected and played via the DVD system in the rear. Tone output is possible both via headphones and via the vehicle loudspeakers.

You can operate the DVD system in the rear with the buttons on the CD/DVD player or with the remote control.

Some functions can only be operated with the remote control.<

Enabling DVD system Enable the DVD system with iDrive. For expla- nation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Unlock rear menu" and press the controller.

5. Select "Rear enabled" and press the con- troller.

The DVD system is enabled.

Controls

1 Display screen

2 Infrared interface for headphones

3 CD/DVD player

4 Headphone connection: Jack plug in/ 3.5 mm

5 12 V sockets, refer to page 115

Folding in display screen The display screen can be folded in when using the ski bag or when transporting bulky pieces of luggage.

Do not open the covers of the center arm- rest or rest your arm on the display screen

with the display screen folded in, as otherwise the display screen may be damaged.<

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

173

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

1. Turn display screen, arrow 1.

The display screen switches off.

2. Fold in display screen, arrow 2.

The display screen is folded out in the reverse order.

CD/DVD player

Controls

1 Press: switching DVD system on/off Turn: volume for headphones on left

2 Eject CD, DVD

3 Start of track, reverse Stop Playback, pause, hold screen Next track, fast forward

4 CD/DVD slot

5 Connection for external device: Cinch sock- ets with protective cap

6 Press: switching DVD system on/off Turn: volume for headphones on right

Connecting headphones You can connect headphones with a in/ 3.5 mm jack plug or operate them using the infrared interface.

Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which infrared headphones are supported by the infrared interface.

When using infrared headphones, the infrared connection between the head-

phones and the infrared interface may not be interrupted. This means that no obstacle may be located between them and the cover of the infrared interface may not be covered or scratched. Unfavorable lighting conditions, such as glaring ambient light, can result in poor reception.<

Remote control

1 Menu navigation

2 Volume for headphones with jack plug

3 Change track or chapter with CD or DVD playback, fast forward/reverse

4 Switch over headphones right/left

5 Open start menu for DVD system

Menu navigation You can navigate through the menus with the knurled wheel 1 and the buttons 1. For explana- tion of concept, also refer to iDrive, page 16.

> Turn the knurled wheel 1: Selecting a menu item.

> Press buttons 1: Changing between fields.

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

174

> Press the button: Activating menu item.

Changing batteries

1. Press the detent and remove the cover.

2. Change the batteries. The type and installa- tion position are marked on the bottom of the battery compartment.

3. Close the cover.

Dispose of used batteries at a collection point or at your BMW Sports Activity

Vehicle Center.<

Sound output via loudspeakers In addition to the headphones, you can also play the sound via the vehicle loudspeakers.

As soon as a plug is inserted in the AUX-In socket in the center console, the sound output of the DVD system via the vehicle loudspeakers is interrupted.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Select "AUX" and press the controller.

Switching DVD system on/off Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

The DVD system switches on automatically when a CD or DVD is inserted.

Playing CD/DVD The menu item with which the contents of the CD/DVD can be called up is dependent on the data on a CD or DVD:

> Video data via "DVD"

> Audio data via "CD"

> Images via "Photo".

Playing videos from CD/DVD

Country codes of DVDs Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod- ing of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The country codes supported by your DVD are con- tained in the information on your DVD.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

175

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

An overview of the coding zones:

Starting playback 1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the

labeled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.

> Playback usually begins automatically after a few seconds.

> If playback does not begin automatically: Select "DVD". Press the button:

2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific menu is displayed for a DVD, select the desired option for menu guidance with the remote control buttons.

Or:

Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

You can control the playback with the buttons on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.

Video CDs, VCD, and Super Video CDs, SVCD, can be played like DVDs if they do

not have a DVD menu of their own.<

Ejecting CD/DVD Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

DVD control With the DVD control, you can select the track and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and operate functions such as Language, Fast for- ward and Reverse or Freeze frame. A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the

DVD control, under certain circumstances while the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible to operate the DVD control under these circum- stances. In this case, try to make the selection using the DVD-specific menu.

1. Press the button on the remote con- trol during playback.

2. Press the buttons on the remote control or turn the knurled wheel to select the desired function.

3. Press the button.

The DVD control disappears again after a short time if you have not selected a function.

Or:

Press the button on the remote control to exit the DVD control.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

Function

Exit DVD control

"SET" Settings for playing DVD

Start playback

Stop playback

Activate and deactivate freeze frame

Skip chapter

Fast forward/reverse

"Menu" Open DVD-specific menu

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

176

Fast forward/reverse

Forward/reverse with DVD control 1. Press the button on the remote con-

trol during playback.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Press the button.

4. Press the button several times to increase the fast forward/reverse speed.

The DVD playback will be distorted.

To cancel fast forward/reverse:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Press the button.

Or:

Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

The DVD will start play at the point selected.

Forward/reverse with remote control Press and hold the button until you reach the desired point.

Or:

1. During playback, turn the knurled wheel. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.

2. Continue to turn the knurled wheel. The speed is increased.

3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.

The DVD will start play at the point selected.

Skipping chapter You can change to the next or previous chapter during playback.

1. Press the button on the remote con- trol during playback.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing until you reach the desired chapter.

Or:

Press the button on the left or right on the remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired chapter.

Freeze frame 1. Press the button on the remote con-

trol during playback.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Press the button.

Continue playback:

1. Select the or symbol.

2. Press the button.

As an alternative you can also stop and con- tinue playback with the button on the CD/ DVD player.

Making settings for DVD 1. Press the button during playback.

2. Make the settings with the remote control:

> "Video settings":

> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of screen display.

> Additional settings can be made after changing to the top field. "Languages": system language of DVD system in rear. "Screen brightness": background brightness of screen.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

177

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

> "Tone":

> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Separately adjustable for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared headphones.

> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.

> "DVD format":

> "Standard"

> "Zoom": full-screen playback.

> "Language": Language or sound track of DVD playback. The language advances one setting each time the menu item is selected.

> "Subtitles": Language of subtitles "00 n/a": no subtitles.

> "Title": Selection of a single track of the DVD.

> "Angle of view": Camera angle Notes or symbols that appear during the playback of a film generally point out differ- ent camera angles. These are usually only briefly available.

> "Menu": Call up the DVD-specific menu.

> "Return": Exit menu or: Press the buttons on the remote con- trol.

Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in vari- ous languages or scene descriptions for the hearing impaired. These functions are stored on the DVD.

With some DVDs, it is only possible to select language, subtitles, camera angle,

or track by using the DVD-specific menu. Refer to the information on your DVD for possi- ble selections. Entries marked in gray in the menus cannot be selected.<

Opening DVD-specific menu Additional functions may be available on DVDs. For example, it is possible to select from several possible plots or display information on the film.

1. Press the button on the remote con- trol during playback.

2. Select "Menu".

3. Press the button.

On some DVDs you will find additional menus with "Main menu" and "Title"

in which, for example, you can select music scenes.<

To make a selection:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Press the button until the desired func- tion is selected.

3. Select the arrow.

4. Press the button.

To return to the start menu:

1. Select the arrow.

2. Press the button.

You can also select language, subtitles, camera angle, or track in the DVD-spe-

cific menu. Observe the information on your DVD.<

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

178

Compressed video files

Playback 1. Select the directory if necessary.

2. Press the button.

3. Select a track.

4. Press the button.

5. Select "Play".

6. Press the button.

To change the directory:

1. Select the directory.

2. Press the button.

Playback functions 1. Select track.

2. Press the button.

3. Select a menu item:

> "Play": Start playback.

> "Pause": Stop and continue playback.

> "Repeat track": Repeat the selected track.

> "Repeat directory": Repeat the tracks in the current direc- tory.

4. Press the button.

Playing audio tracks from CD/DVD

Starting playback Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.

> Playback begins automatically after a few seconds.

> If playback does not begin automatically: Select "CD". Press the button:

For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to page 180, it may take approx. 1 minute

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

179

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

to read the data depending on the directory structure.

To start playback when there is already a CD/DVD in the drive:

1. Open the start menu with the remote con- trol.

2. Select "CD".

As an alternative you can also control the play- back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.

Ejecting CD/DVD:

Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

Selecting a track

Buttons on the CD/DVD player Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track. Playback begins at the start of the track.

Via the remote control Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly or turn the knurled wheel until you reach the desired track. Playback begins at the start of the track.

Settings and playback functions for audio CDs/DVDs 1. Select "SET".

2. Press the button.

3. Make the settings with the remote control:

> "Tone":

> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Separately adjustable for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared headphones.

> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.

> "Pause": Stop and continue playback.

> "Random": In this mode, the tracks on the CD/DVD are played once in a random sequence.

> "Scan": Automatically briefly sample all tracks of the CD/DVD consecutively.

> "Repeat": Repeat the current track. Select again to end.

Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the CD/DVD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Remote control:

Press and hold the button until you reach the desired point.

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

180

Compressed audio files

Playback 1. Select the directory if necessary.

2. Press the button.

3. Select a track.

4. Press the button.

5. Select "Play".

6. Press the button.

To change the directory:

1. Select the directory.

2. Press the button.

Settings and playback functions for compressed audio files 1. Select a track.

2. Press the button.

3. Make the settings with the remote control:

> "Tone":

> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Separately adjustable for the left and right headphones and the infrared head- phones

> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.

> "Play": Start playback.

> "Pause": Stop and continue playback.

> "Scan directory": Briefly sample the tracks in the current directory.

> "Scan all": Briefly sample all tracks.

> "Random directory": Play the titles in the current directory in a random sequence.

> "Random all": Play all tracks in a random sequence.

> "Repeat track": Repeat the selected track.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

181

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

> "Repeat directory": Repeat the tracks in the current directory.

> "Details": Display any stored information on the cur- rent track.

Displaying images from CD/DVD 1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the

labeled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.

2. Open the start menu with the remote con- trol.

3. Select "Photo".

4. Press the button.

Displaying overview 1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.

1. Select "Overview".

2. Press the button. It may take some time until the overview is completely displayed.

If a symbol is shown instead of an image, the image cannot be shown in the over-

view.<

Displaying images 1. Select an image with the buttons of the

remote control.

2. Press the button.

3. Select type of display:

> Scroll with the menu guidance buttons of the remote control.

> Show slide show: Turn the knurled wheel to set the display time of the images. Stop slide show: Select "Stop".

Adjusting 1. Press the button.

2. Select a menu item:

3. Press the button.

Function

Return to the Photo menu

"SET" Set the "Screen brightness" of the screen. "Languages": the language of the system can be set after changing to the top field.

Start slide show

Show first/last image

Rotate image by 90

"Overview" Change to image overview

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

182

Ending display 1. Press the button.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Press the button.

Ejecting CD/DVD Press the button on the CD/DVD player.

Information on CD/DVD player

Safety notes The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser product. Do not operate if the cover

is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result.<

Suitable media Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become

detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm. Never play CDs/DVDs with adapters, e.g. sin- gle-CDs, as otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may not be ejected. Never use combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus or hybrid disks, as otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and may not be ejected.<

The CD/DVD player can play the following media:

> Video DVD

> CD-DA (Audio CD)

> CDs/DVDs with compressed image files

> CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files

> CDs/DVDs with compressed video files

DVD Audio is not supported by the DVD player. However, many audio DVDs available in stores also contain a video track in the DVD Video for- mat in addition to the audio track. These DVDs can be played back by the DVD player. Please refer to the information on your DVD to deter-

mine whether your audio DVD contains an addi- tional video track. Depending on the authoring used, it is possible that not all functions are available during playback.

Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers are coated on both sides and bear no markings. This means both sides are information carriers. To play the information on the other side, turn over the DVD.

Supported formats Depending on the compression method used, not all files of the specified formats can be opened

Images JPEG/JPG

With very large image files, it may take a longer time until the images are shown.

Compressed audio files > MP3

> WMA

> OGG

> AAC

Compressed video files > VCD

> SVCD

> MPEG1

> MPEG2

> MPEG4/DivX

Digital Rights Management DRM It may not be possible to play CDs/CVDs with integrated Digital Rights Management.

General malfunctions The BMW CD/DVD player is optimized for oper- ation in the vehicle. It may react more sensi- tively to defective CDs/DVDs than devices intended for stationary use.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

183

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Make sure that no foreign bodies or liq- uids enter the CD-/DVD slot, as otherwise

the CD/DVD player will be damaged.<

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes.

Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsis- tent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the side with the label using a pen intended for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois- ture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro- tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

Care instructions You can find everything you need to know on this topic by consulting the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.

External device

Connecting

1 Connections for audio/video cables: Watch the colors of the sockets when con- necting. Yellow socket: video White socket: audio left Red socket: audio right

2 Power supply for external device: sockets with removable cap, also refer to page 115

Playback 1. Switch on the external device and start the

playback.

2. Open the start menu with the remote con- trol.

3. Select "AUX".

4. Press the button.

For devices without a video signal, e.g. MP3 players, "No video signal" is shown. The sound is nevertheless played.

D V

D s

ys te

m in

re ar

184

Settings for external devices 1. Press the button during playback.

2. Make the settings with the remote control:

> "Video settings":

> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of video playback.

> "NTSC color": The color can be adjusted on an external device with the NTSC standard.

> "Standard": The DVD system in the rear can be adapted to external devices with various TV standards. When doing so, also refer to the operating manual of the external device.

> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.

> "Tone":

> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance" can be adjusted for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared head- phones.

> "Reset": Your settings are reset.

> Additional settings can be made after changing to the top field. "Audio": the volume of the external device can be adjusted to the volume of the CD/DVD player. "Languages": system language of the DVD system in the rear "Screen brightness": background brightness of screen

> "DVD format (AUX)":

> "Standard"

> "Zoom": full-screen playback

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

185

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Communications This chapter summarizes how to operate your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and

how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

188

Telephoning

The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After logging on a suitable mobile phone on the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.

A mobile phone that has been logged on once is automatically detected again with the engine running or the ignition switched on as soon as it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up to four mobile phones can be stored simulta- neously. If several mobile phones are detected simultaneously, the respective last mobile phone logged on can be operated via the vehi- cle.

Using a phone in your vehicle

Using snap-in adapter* The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone cradle, enables the battery to be charged and the mobile phone to be connected to the exter- nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures improved network reception and a consistent voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile phones snap-in adapters are offered for.

BMW discourages the use of mobile phones or other mobile communications

devices inside the vehicle without a direct con- nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication device can influence one another. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation which results from transmission will be dissipated from the vehicle interior.<

Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.

For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer- gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when the traffic situa- tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the

mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis- tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package or which mobile phones snap-in adapters are available for. These mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual with a certain software version. Mal- functions can occur with other mobile phones.

Care instructions You can find what you need to know about car- ing for your mobile phone in the Caring for your vehicle brochure and in the separate mobile phone operating instructions.

Operating options You can operate the mobile phoneusing:

> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

> iDrive, refer to page 192

> Voice commands, refer to page 197

*

189

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21

Phoning with the BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist calls You can use the BMW Assist system via the hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.

When the status information "Communication" or "BMW Assist" is displayed in "BMW Ser- vice", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con- nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress. If this happens, you must log off the mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.

Commissioning

Logging on mobile phone on vehicle The following prerequisites must be met:

> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone prepara- tion package.

> The mobile phone is ready to operate.

> The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to page 192, and on the mobile phone is active.

> Depending on the mobile phone, preset- tings on the mobile phone are necessary, e.g. via the menu item Bluetooth activated or the menu item Connection not with con- firmation.

> Depending on the mobile phone model, the setting energy saving mode can, for exam- ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the logged-on mobile phone.

> For logging on, specify any desired number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue- tooth passkey is no longer required follow- ing successful logon.

> The ignition is switched on.

Only log on the mobile phone with the vehicle stopped, otherwise the passen-

gers and other road users can be endangered due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver.<

Switching on ignition 1. Insert the remote control as far as possible

into the ignition lock.

2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/ Stop button without depressing the brake pedal.

Preparation via iDrive iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

3. Press the button to open the start menu.

4. Press the controller to open the menu.

5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

190

7. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.

8. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Preparation with mobile phone 9. Additional operations must be carried out

on the mobile phone and differ depending on the model, refer to the operating instruc- tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con- nect or link under Bluetooth device.

Logging on Depending on your mobile phone, you will first be requested consecutively via the display of your mobile phone or the Control Display to enter the Bluetooth passkey you specified.

Display on the Control Display if the Bluetooth passkey can be entered via iDrive:

10. Select "Add device" and press the control- ler.

11. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, approx. 30 seconds are available for entering the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and on the Control Display.

12. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.

13. Wait a few seconds until the list of the logged-on mobile phones is shown on the Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

To cancel the logon of the mobile phone on the vehicle: Select "Refuse connection" and press the con- troller.

The next time you use the mobile phone in the vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max- imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- ted to your vehicle, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone if necessary. This transfer is dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the operating instructions of

191

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

your mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes.

Up to four mobile phones can be logged on consecutively. If you log on a fifth mobile phone, the logon data of the last mobile phone in the list will be deleted, refer to below.

List of logged-on mobile phones All mobile phones for which the vehicle has stored the logon data can be displayed. If sev- eral logged-on mobile phones are detected by the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi- cle.

You can change the order of the mobile phones in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper- ated via the vehicle.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

7. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

8. Select "Move device up" and press the con- troller.

The selected mobile phone is moved upward by one position.

Logging mobile phone off vehicle If you no longer want to operate your mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon data of the mobile phone.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

7. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

8. Select "Delete device" and press the con- troller. The logged-off mobile phone is deleted from the list.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

192

The phone book entries you have trans- ferred from your mobile phone to your vehi- cle are also deleted in the process.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries. Observe the applicable local

regulations. Temporarily disconnect the Blue- tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary.<

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com- puter.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. Remove the mobile phone from the snap-in adapter and switch it off.

2. Press the button to open the start menu.

3. Press the controller to open the menu.

4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

6. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.

7. Select "Settings" and press the controller. The Bluetooth link is activated.

8. Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deac- tivate the link.

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is main- tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions via iDrive:

> Accepting a call

> Dialing phone numbers

> Dialing phone numbers from the phone book

> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls

193

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

> Ending a call

When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after removing the remote control from the ignition lock, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.

Speech quality If the person you are talking to cannot under- stand you well, this may be due to excessively loud background noises. The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain degree. To optimize the speech quality during a call, we recommend that you:

> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing the air volume of the automatic climate control or pointing the front air vents downward

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys- tem.

Requirements The logon data of the mobile phone are stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to operate.

The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to open "Com- munication".

Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num- ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

Accepting a call

Select "Accept" and press the controller.

Rejecting a call Select "Reject" and press the controller. The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing the individual digits and pressing the con- troller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number. The letters correspond to the digits on the keypad of the mobile phone.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

194

To delete an incorrect character: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller.

4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are calling, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your service pro- vider.

Calling with programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store phone numbers on the program- mable memory/direct selection buttons to call them directly, refer to page 21.

Ending call 1. Select the phone number and press the

controller.

2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Dialing a phone number from phone book or a phone number stored in a list Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls and the entries of the phone book are stored in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in the phone book, the name of the entry is dis- played instead of the phone number.

You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.

Five lists are available:

> "A - Z" The entries of the mobile-phone phone book, consisting of the name and phone number, are sorted alphabetically.

> "Top 8" The eight numbers called most frequently from the phone book "A - Z" are automati- cally stored in the Top 8 list. The list is sorted according to frequency.

> "Redial" The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.

> "Missed calls" The phone numbers of the last eight calls which were not accepted are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent.

> "Received calls" The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent.

195

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Dialing phone numbers from phone book The list "A - Z" is available for your phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the first letters of the desired entry and press the controller.

4. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.

If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.

You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

5. Change the phone number.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.

Dialing phone numbers stored in a list To select an entry and establish a connection:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select list and press the controller:

> "Top 8"

> "Redial"

> "Missed calls"

> "Received calls"

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

196

Deleting individual entries 1. Select the desired entry from the list and

press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller. The entry is deleted.

Deleting entire list 1. Select an entry from the list and press the

controller.

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.

3. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.

BMW Contact* If BMW Assist is not enabled, you can display several service phone numbers:

> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group when you require breakdown assistance

> BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center, e.g. when you want to make an appointment for service

> BMW Hotline* for information on all aspects of your vehicle

You can select the displayed service phone numbers if your mobile phone is logged on in the vehicle.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con- troller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.

5. Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:

> "Roadside Assistance"

> "Customer Relations"

> "Service Request"

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

Contact is established.

Transferring phone number via tone dialing method The tone dialing method is required for access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.

This function is available when a connection has been established.

197

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

1. Establish connection.

2. With single drive: Press the controller. Select "Keypad" and press the controller. With two drives: Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected.

3. Select the desired characterand press the controller. Each character is sent immediately and confirmed by a tone depending on the mobile phone model.

Changing between mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to handsfree system You can continue calls begun outside the Blue- tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys- tem when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches over to the handsfree mode.

For mobile phones that do not automatically switch over to the handsfree mode:

> Depending on the mobile phone model used, the conversation can also be contin- ued via the handsfree system if necessary. Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.

> Press the button above the storage compartment. Switching over may take several seconds.

From handsfree system to mobile phone When you telephone via the handsfree system, you can also continue the call via the mobile phone if necessary, depending on the mobile phone model. Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper- ating instructions of your mobile phone.

Depending on your mobile phone model, poor reception of the wireless communications net- work can result in the system changing from the hands-free system to the mobile phone.

Operation by voice*

The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to remove your hands from the steering wheel. When making your entries, you will be supported by announcements and questions in many cases.

The same prerequisites as for operation via iDrive apply, refer to page 192.

Symbols in Owner's Manual {...}Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

198

Voice commands

Activating system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.

An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say the command. The text or numbers that the voice com- mand system has registered will appear on the Control Display.

Ending/canceling operation by voice Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or

In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command, e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word. You can have the possible commands spoken by the system at any point:

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

Example: dialing phone numbers To start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Adjusting volume You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Turn the knob during an instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini- mum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

{Cancel}.

{Help}

{Dial name} or {Name}.

Command Response

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or {{123 456 7890. And next?}}

{Dial} {{Dialing number}}

199

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

Correcting phone number After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.

Deleting input {Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered so far.

Voice phone book Operating by voice command requires a per- sonal voice phone book.

> With combined drives for audio CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are automati- cally applied from your mobile phone's memory.

> With a single drive, the entries must be entered by voice and are independent of your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it is not possible to use voice command either to call phone numbers stored in the mobile phone or to store new numbers.

Creating and editing voice phone book* Store entry:

An entry always consists of a name and phone number.

Delete entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone book.

Delete all entries:

{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the phone book.

Have entries read aloud and select:

You can have all the entries of your voice phone book read aloud in the order of input and select a certain entry to establish a connection:

1. {Dial number}. The dialog for establishing a telephone connection is opened.

2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.

3. {Dial}. The connection to the desired sub- scriber is established.

{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.

1. {Save name}. The dialog for storing a name is opened.

2. Speak the name and repeat entry upon request. The spoken length of the names in the phone book must not exceed approx. 2 seconds.

3. Say the phone number when prompted.

4. To store the phone number: {Save}.

1. {Delete name}. The dialog for deleting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phone book}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.

2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the repeated prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Read phone book}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.

2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is read aloud.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

200

Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

Redialing The {Redial} command opens "Redial".

Notes The commands in English were available as of this printing. Other languages are

currently not available. To operate the mobile phone via the voice command system, refer to page 23.<

Important for voice commands For voice commands, keep the following in mind:

> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor- mal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from ambi- ent noise.

> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Mounting/removing snap-in adapter 1. Press the area 1 around the button and

remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and press down until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press the area 1 around the button.

1. {Dial name}. The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

201

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Inserting mobile phone 1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile

phone's antenna connector if necessary, so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons facing upward toward the electrical connec- tions and press down until it engages.

The mobile phone battery is charged from the radio readiness position.

To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid using the phone when the ignition is

switched off.<

Removing mobile phone

Press the button.

B M

W A

ss is

t

202

BMW Assist

BMW Assist provides you with various services. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transferred to the BMW Assist Response Center if an emergency call* has been initiated.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- vidually agreed contract.

After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Fol- lowing the deactivation of the BMW Assist sys- tem, no BMW Assist service is available. The BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a new contract.

Requirements If the following requirements are met, you can use BMW Assist:

> The installed BMW Assist system is logged in on a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmit- ting the services.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.

> For BMW Assist to be activated and updated, the GPS signal must be available.

> You have signed the BMW Assist contract of participation at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been com- pleted.

> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 207.

Services offered The following services are available via BMW Assist:

> Emergency calls, refer to page 236: When you press the SOS button, a connec- tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and arranges for further steps to help you.

> Automatic emergency call: Under certain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center then contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

> Roadside Assistance: You can call Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group should you require help in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehi- cle and position data are transmitted in the process.

> BMW Hotline: For information on all aspects of your vehi- cle, you can be connected to the BMW Hot- line.

> TeleService: Data on your vehicle's service status or nec- essary inspections are transmitted to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appoint- ment.

> Unlocking vehicle: Inform the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. if your remote control is not available and you want to have the vehicle unlocked.

> Vehicle search: After your vehicle has been reported to the police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can locate its position.

*

203

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

In addition, you can be provided with other ser- vices, e.g. the information service or informa- tion on route planning, the traffic situation and the weather. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center, see below.

You also have access to the BMW Assist infor- mation service via the Internet.

Special aspects of the services offered The following special aspects apply to the ser- vices:

> The services offered are country-specific.

> Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.

> The data transferred can, for example, be the vehicle data, your current position or the data of the CBS Condition Based Service.

Using services

Contact to the BMW Assist Response Center You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center with the SOS button.

1. Briefly press protective cover to open. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

The BMW Assist Response Center is con- tacted.

Breakdown assistance iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.

If the current position can be determined, the current vehicle location is displayed.

5. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

B M

W A

ss is

t

204

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group.

TeleService

Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on necessary inspections is transmitted auto- matically directly to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center was notified.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Service notification" and press the controller.

Manual service notification You can transmit data on the maintenance state of your vehicle to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center if you want to make an appoint- ment for service.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Service Request"

5. Press the controller.

205

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

The data relevant for service are transmitted. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will contact you to set up an appointment for ser- vice.

Contacting BMW Hotline For information on all aspects of your vehicle, you can contact the BMW Hotline.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Customer Relations".

5. Press the controller.

6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

You are connected to the BMW Hotline by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Information service* When you call the information service of BMW Assist, you can, for example, obtain infor- mation on current events, filling stations or hotels and have their phone numbers and addresses transferred. Reservations can be made at many hotels directly by the BMW Infor- mation Service.

The information service must be enabled sepa- rately by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Calling up information 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Concierge" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "New data request" and press the controller.

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the information service.

B M

W A

ss is

t

206

Displaying transferred data Select the received message if necessary and press the controller.

Dialing phone number or applying address in destination guidance 1. Select "Options" and press the controller.

2. Select a menu item:

> With "Call" you can establish a telephone connection. This requires your Bluetooth mobile phone to be logged on in the vehicle.

> With "Select as destination" you can apply the address in the destination guidance of the navigation system.

Customizing BMW Assist

Displaying and updating services You will be notified of any changes in the ser- vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case you should update the services.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Services" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller. The current services of BMW Assist are dis- played.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the controller.

207

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Blocking services* If you block the services, the connection to BMW Assist is deactivated.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Services" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the controller.

The use of BMW Assist is blocked, and the cur- rent vehicle position will not be transferred dur- ing an emergency call*. To cancel the blocking, and reactivate BMW Assist, see below. This does not affect the contractual agreements.

Reactivate BMW Assist if necessary to re- enable.

Activating BMW Assist For you to be able to use the services of BMW Assist, BMW Assist must be activated.

Requirements > Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current position. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

> Leave the ignition switched on while con- necting to the system.

Activating 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

B M

W A

ss is

t

208

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Services" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the con- troller. BMW Assist is activated and the data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.

Activation takes a few minutes. The status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues to run in the background.

Displaying vehicle data When BMW Assist is enabled, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle can be displayed.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Services" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Profile" is selected and press the controller.

209

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Mobility This section helps you maintain your

mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and breakdown assistance.

R ef

u el

in g

212

Refueling

Switch off the engine before refueling. When handling fuel, always observe all

applicable precautionary measures and regula- tions. Never transport reserve fuel containers in the vehicle. These could become leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Fuel filler door

Opening

1. Open the fuel filler door. To do this, briefly press the lower edge.

2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.

Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel filler cap between the fuel filler cap and

the vehicle. If the cap is loose or missing, a mes- sage* is displayed after a certain time.<

Releasing manually If an electrical malfunction should occur, you can unlock the fuel filler door manually.

1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo bay.

2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels always observe any safety guidelines posted at the service

station.<

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to

> premature pump shutoff

> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity > X5 3.0si:

Approx. 22.5 US gal/85 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

> X5 4.8i: Approx. 22.5 US gal/85 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

M o

b il

it y

213

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Fuel specifications Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise damage to the catalytic converter will

result. Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85% ethanol, or Flex Fuel, otherwise permanent damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys- tem will result.<

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is 87.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no affect on the engine life.

Do not use gasoline below the specified minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-

age can result.<

Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant dif- ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain- ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems

especially under certain environmental condi- tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

214

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure

Information for your safety The condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only to the tire's service life, but also to driving com- fort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it as needed, even on the

compact tire*: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this pre- caution, you may be driving on tires with incor- rect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an acci- dent. Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat tires, except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seri- ously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 87, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 89.<

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes and tire brands respectively

approved and recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW Sports Activ- ity Vehicle Center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow- ing:

> Tire sizes of your vehicle

> Load conditions

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for speeds up to 100 mph/160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column Traveling speeds up to max. of 100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.

These pressure specifications can be found on the door post when you open the driver's door.

The permissible top speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.

Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam- age and accidents may result.<

Tire inflation pressures for speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please

observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<

M o

b il

it y

215

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the law could occur.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

216

Tire inflation pressures for X5 3.0si/4.8i with two rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Compact wheel*: T 155/90 D 18 113 M

61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420

without sport package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 36/250

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 33/230 32/220 32/220 32/220 36/250

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230

with sport package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 36/250

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 33/230 32/220 32/220 32/220 36/250

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 244.

M o

b il

it y

217

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tire inflation pressures for X5 3.0si/4.8i with three rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without sport package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 33/230 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 35/240 - 33/230 - 38/260

with sport package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 33/230 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 35/240 - 41/280

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 35/240 - 41/280

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 35/240 - 36/250 - 42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 244.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

218

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed letter Q= up to 100 mph/160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 0307 indicates that the tire was manufactured in week 3 of 2007.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<

e.g.

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Belted construction radial Rim diameter in inches Carrying capacity ID-code (not in ZR tires) Speed code letter (in ZR tires before the R)

255/55 R 18 109 H

e.g.

Manufacturer code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 0806

M o

b il

it y

219

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 220.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.

XL Indicates specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of

0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum- ference and are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been driven down to the wear indicators, a tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.

Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazards and consequential dam- ages. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These kinds of problems may also be signaled by other changes in vehicle response, such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Tire damage can be extremely dangerous for occupants and other road users.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

220

Run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire. Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce- ment ensures that the tire retains some residual safety in the event of pressure drop and driving remains possible to a restricted degree.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire page 88

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- sage with low tire inflation pressure page 90

New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle

Center or a tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam- age and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tires BMW does not recommend that you use retreaded tires, as driving safety may be

impaired. The causes for this include the possi- bly different tire casing structures and the often wide variations in their age, which can result in a limited service life.<

The right wheels and tires BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions than the approved units these differences could lead to body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot be held liable for driving safety.<

When changing to larger wheels and tires, it may be necessary to make changes to

the wheel-well trim piece, as otherwise road users could be endangered or the vehicle could be damaged. Only have this work carried out by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained per- sonnel.<

You can ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center for the correct wheel/tire combination.

The correct wheel/tire combination also affects various systems whose function would other- wise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC, xDrive or Flat Tire Monitor*.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single tread config- uration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire, refer to page 89. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you on this subject.

M o

b il

it y

221

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Recommended tire brands

Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW depending on the tire size. You can recognize these from the clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.

When used properly, these tires comply with the most demanding standards for safety and vehicle response.

Run-flat tires When mounting new tires, or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. In addition, no spare tire is available in case of a flat tire. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends that you do not have damaged run-flat

tires repaired; they should be replaced.<

Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed Always observe the maximum permissi- ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise

tire damage may occur, which can result in acci- dents.<

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Rotating wheels between axles BMW does not recommend moving the front wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the handling characteristics may be impaired.

Snow chains* BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains, classifies them as road-safe and recommends them. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center can provide you with this information.

Use is only permissible in pairs on the rear wheels.

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.

After mounting snow chains, do not ini- tialize the Flat Tire Monitor*, as otherwise

incorrect displays can occur. When you are driving with snow chains, it can be beneficial to activate DTC briefly, refer to page 85.<

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

222

Under the hood

Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without

the required professional technical training. If you do not know what repair procedures to fol- low, have work on your vehicle done only by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may

result. If you see any signs that the hood is not com- pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you should stop at once and close it securely.<

M o

b il

it y

223

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Engine compartment

1 Washer fluid reservoir of the headlamp and windshield cleaning systems, refer to page 64

2 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 237

3 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 225

4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil, page 224

Engine oil The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level check.

The condition for the most accurate indication of the oil level possible is measurement with the engine at operating temperature, i.e. following an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km. You can display the oil level while driving or when stopped on a level surface with the engine running.

iDrive, for explanation of concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

224

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the control- ler. The oil level is displayed.

Possible messages > "Engine oil level O.K."

> "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement...": Engine oil level is being measured. This process can take approx. 3 minutes when stopped on a level surface and approx. 5 minutes while driving.

> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil.": Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next opportunity.

> "Engine oil level too high":

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately, otherwise engine damage may

result if too much oil has been added.<

> "Please observe recalculated service inter- val for engine oil": Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is possible. To do this, observe the recalcu- lated remaining mileage until the next oil change service, refer to page 226. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of oil until a corre- sponding message is shown on the Control Dis- play.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.<

Continuous exposure to used oil has caused cancer in laboratory testing.

For this reason, any skin areas that come into contact with oil should be thoroughly washed with soap and water. Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and observe the warnings on the containers to pre- vent health risks.<

Oil change Only have an oil change carried out by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel.

Approved engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe- cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Do not use oil additives, as these may result in engine damage.<

Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is unavailable, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only use oils of the specification API SH or higher.

M o

b il

it y

225

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to answer detailed ques-

tions on BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<

You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Viscosity grades Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is specified in SAE grades.

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on the climatic conditions in the region in which you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the SAE grades 5W-40 and 5W-30.<

These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.

Coolant Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

Coolant is comprised of water and coolant addi- tive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center can recommend suit- able additives.

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. The additives

present a health hazard; observe the instruc- tions on the containers.<

Comply with the appropriate environ- mental protection regulations when dis-

posing of coolant additives.<

Checking coolant level 1. The engine must be at ambient tempera-

ture.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter- clockwise to allow any accumulated pres- sure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct when the cool- ant level is between the MIN and MAX marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

M ai

n te

n an

ce

226

Maintenance

BMW maintenance system

The BMW maintenance system supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The service schedule also includes operations related to the vehicle's comfort and convenience features, such as replacement of the filters for the inside air. The ultimate objective is to ensure economical maintenance by providing the ideal service for your vehicle.

Should the day come when you decide to sell your BMW, a complete dealer service history will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

You can set the Control Display to show remaining distances and times of selected maintenance intervals and legally mandated deadlines, refer to page 71:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads, front and rear separately

> Brake fluid

> Vehicle check

> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in remote control Your vehicle stores the information required for maintenance continuously in the remote con- trol during driving. After accessing the data stored in the remote control, your BMW Service Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of service procedures for your own individual vehi- cle. You should therefore hand over the remote control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser- vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for service.

Make sure the date is set correctly, refer to page 78, otherwise the effectiveness

of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<

M o

b il

it y

227

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics interface

Components which are decisive for the exhaust-gas composition can be checked via the OBD socket with a device.

This socket is located to the left on the driver's side, on the underside of the instrument panel under a cover.

Exhaust-gas values The warning lamp lights up. The exhaust-gas values worsen. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Display of the previously described malfunction in Canadian models.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In this case you should reduce your speed and proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage to the emission-relevant com- ponents, especially the catalytic converter, within a short time.

The warning lamp lights up if the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system can close when fuel

vapor escapes. If the fuel filler cap is then tight- ened, the display must go out within a few days.

Event Data Recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a device for recording or transmitting certain vehicle data or information. If you have also signed a contract of participation for BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can be trans- mitted or recorded to enable corresponding services.

Care Important information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

228

Replacing components

Onboard toolkit

The onboard toolkit is located in the cargo bay under the floor panel.

Replacing wiper blades

Front 1. Fold down the wiper arm.

2. Swing the wiper blade upward.

3. Remove the wiper blade toward the wind- shield, refer to arrow.

Rear

1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off the wiper blade, refer to arrow.

2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on until it is heard to engage.

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent in replacing them. BMW recommends having your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center per- form any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its metal socket.<

A replacement bulb set is available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Only replace bulbs when cool, as other- wise you may be burned.<

Whenever you perform any work on the electrical system, turn off the systems/

consumers involved to prevent short circuits from occurring. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<

M o

b il

it y

229

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

For care and maintenance of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.

For bulbs for which replacement is not described and for checking and adjusting

headlamp aim, please contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several

hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

Xenon bulbs The service life of these bulbs is very long and the probability of a failure is very low, provided that they are not switched on and off an unusual number of times. If one of these bulbs should nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv- ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro- vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit this.

Have work on the xenon light unit includ- ing changing the bulb carried out only by

your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when work is carried out improperly.<

Halogen bulbs: Parking lamps and low beams H8 bulb, 35 watts

The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear safety glasses and protective gloves.

Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replace- ment.<

1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.

2. Turn the bulbs to the left, pull off the con- nector and replace.

3. Install in the reverse order.

Turn signals, front 24-watt bulb, PSY24W

1. Unscrew bulb holder with bulb to the left, refer to arrow, and replace.

2. Install in the reverse order.

Side marker lamps, rear To replace, please go to a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

230

Tail lamps > Turn signals, brake lamps: 21-watt bulb,

P21W

> Backup lamps and brake force display: 16-watt bulb, W16W

> Rear lamp: LED technology. In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a work- shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Position of lamps

1 Rear lamp

2 Brake force display

3 Turn signal

4 Brake lamp/rear lamp

5 Backup lamp

6 Brake lamp

Brake lamp 1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.

2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian- gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.

3. Turn the bulb socket concerned to the left and remove.

4. Remove the upper bulb for replacement. Apply gentle pressure to the lower bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

5. Remount the side panel.

Turn signal 1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.

2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian- gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.

3. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

5. Remount the side panel.

Backup lamp 1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.

2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian- gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.

3. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove.

4. Remove the bulb for replacement.

5. Remount the side panel.

M o

b il

it y

231

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Brake force display 1. Carefully remove the cap in the cover of the

liftgate with a screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and engage it.

5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo bay lamp. Then lay the cap on its upper side and close it, refer to arrow.

6. Position the cargo bay lamp and clip it in, refer to arrow.

License plate lamp 5-watt bulb, C11 12W

1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screw- driver, refer to arrow 1.

2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinstall the lamp.

Center brake lamp This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

232

Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as standard. As a result, it is not necessary to change the wheel immediately in the case of air loss in the event of a breakdown.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire page 88

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- sage with low tire inflation pressure page 90

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires, page 220.

When mounting new tires, or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. No spare tire is avail- able in case of a flat tire. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you. Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 220.

Suitable tools for changing tires are avail- able as accessories at your BMW Sports

Activity Vehicle Center.<

Jacking points for vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located in the positions shown.

Compact wheel* Safety precautions in the event of a flat tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as

far as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers. Set the parking brake and engage transmission position P. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle

and ensure that they remain outside the imme- diate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi- cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu- lations. Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as snow, ice, tiles, etc. Position the jack on a firm support surface. Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a support base for the jack, as this would prevent it from extending to its full support height and reduce its load-carrying capacity. To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is supported by the jack.<

What you will need To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi- tions of the tools before removing them, then return them to their initial positions after com- pleting work. The tools are located in the mount under the floor panel flap.

1 Lug wrench* 2 Vehicle jack crank* 3 Vehicle jack*

M o

b il

it y

233

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Removing compact wheel The compact wheel is located in the cargo bay under the floor panel.

1. Remove the tool mount

2. Unscrew the wing nut 1.

3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.

4. Remove the compact wheel.

Preparing wheel change 1. Observe the safety precautions above.

2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking up vehicle 1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point

closest to the wheel so that the entire sur- face of the jack base rests on the ground perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.

The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only. Do not attempt

to raise another vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and personal injury.<

2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular recess of the jacking point when cranking up, refer to illustration detail.

3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are changing is raised from the ground.

Mounting a wheel 1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.

2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub. Also clean the lug bolts.

3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel. Secure the wheel by screwing at least two lug bolts into opposite bolt holes. When you mount wheels other than Genu- ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug bolts may also be required.

4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from beneath the vehicle.

After mounting 1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.

To ensure safety, always have the lug bolts checked with a calibrated

torque wrench as soon as possible to ensure that they are tightened to the speci- fied torque. The tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.<

2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo bay.

The defective wheel cannot be stored under the floor panel flap due to its

different dimensions.<

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

234

3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure at the earliest opportunity.

Protect valve stems with valve screw caps against dirt and contamination.

Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source of gradual air loss.<

4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 87, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 89.

5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi- ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.

Driving with compact wheel Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

The driving characteristics change, for example reduced track stability on braking, extended braking distance, and altered self-steering characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction with winter tires, these characteristics are more pronounced.

Only one compact wheel may be mounted. You should re-equip with

wheels and tires of the original size as quickly as possible.<

Vehicle battery

Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Charging battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 237.

Disposal Have old batteries disposed of following replacement at your BMW Sports Activity

Vehicle Center or bring them to a collection point. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping over during transport.<

Power failure After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings are also lost and must be updated:

> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 42.

> Time and Date The values must be updated, refer to pages 77, 78.

> Radio Stations must be stored again if necessary, refer to page 160.

> Navigation system Wait until the system starts, refer to page 151.

Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, as this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo bay.

M o

b il

it y

235

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Other fuses are located in the front passenger footwell on the underside of the instrument panel. In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair proce- dures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Spare fuses, a pair of plastic tweezers and infor- mation on the fuse assignment are located near the fuses in the cargo bay.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

236

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency call Conditions for an emergency call:

> Full preparation package mobile phone. With this equipment, an emergency call is still possible when no mobile phone is logged on in the vehicle.

> BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 207.

> Radio readiness is switched on.

> The BMW Assist system is logged in on a wireless communications network.

> The emergency call system is operable.

When the contract of participation with BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center without having to visit a work- shop. Following deactivation of the BMW Assist system, no emergency calls can be made. The BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a new contract.

Initiating an emergency call 1. Briefly press protective cover to open.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

2. Press the SOS button for at least 2 sec- onds.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.

When the emergency call is received at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and arranges for additional steps to help you.

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

If the current position of your vehicle can be determined, it will be forwarded to the BMW Assist Response Center.

If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear the BMW Assist Response Center through the hands-free system, this could indicate, for instance, that the hands-free system is no longer operational. However, you may then still be audible for the BMW Assist Response Cen- ter.

Under certain conditions, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. The automatic emergency call is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the emergency call cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable

conditions.<

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located in the cargo bay. Open the left-hand side panel.

M o

b il

it y

237

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

First-aid kit* Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace the contents concerned in good time if necessary.

The first-aid kit is located in the cargo bay. Open the left-hand side panel.

Roadside Assistance* The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group offers you assistance in the event of a break- down around the clock, including on weekends and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.

With BMW Assist or TeleService, you can con- tact the Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in the event of a break- down directly via iDrive, refer to page 203.

Jump starting When your battery is discharged, you can use two jumper cables to start your BMW with power from the battery in a second vehicle. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical

components while the engine is running. Care- fully adhere to the following sequence, both to

prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle.

3. Switch off any electrical systems and com- ponents in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise

there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cables To avoid personal injury from sparks, follow this sequence when connecting

jumper cables.<

On your BMW the so-called starting-aid termi- nal in the engine compartment acts as the bat- tery positive terminal, also refer to the engine compartment overview on page 223. The cover cap is marked with +.

1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting- aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+ to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle provid- ing assistance.

3. Attach the second end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a start- ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

238

4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/ to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle. Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting engine 1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle

and allow it to run at idle for several minutes at slightly increased speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the connection sequence.

Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using tow fitting The screw-on tow-fitting must always be car- ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is located in the toolkit under the floor panel flap in the cargo bay, refer to page 228.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi- cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<

Access to screw thread Cover panel in bumper: press on the arrow sym- bol on the cover panel.

Front

Rear

M o

b il

it y

239

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 56, otherwise the low

beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield wipers would not be available. When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. This then requires increased effort for braking and steer- ing. Active steering is deactivated and larger steering wheel movements are required.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend- ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys- tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Engage transmission position N and release the parking brake before towing. Manually releasing transmission lock, refer to page 61.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/ 70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged.<

Towing methods Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise damage may

result.<

In some countries, towing with tow bars or ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar- ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the respective country.

With tow bar The towing vehicle may not be lighter than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it

will not be possible to reliably control vehicle response.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will exert lateral forces, tending to push the vehicle sideways.

Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can

lead to damage.<

With tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to damage.<

With tow truck Do not tow the X5 with the front or rear axle raised individually, otherwise the

wheels may lock and the transfer case may be damaged.<

The X5 may only be transported on a flat bed.

Tow-starting The engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Start the engine by jump starting it, refer to page 237. Have the cause of the starting difficulties elimi- nated.

Reference This chapter contains the technical data,

the short commands of the voice command system, and the index that will direct you as quickly as possible to the information

you are looking for.

f r

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

242

Technical data

Engine data

X5 3.0si X5 4.8i

Displacement cu in/cm 182.8/2,996 292.9/4,799

No. of cylinders 6 8

Maximum output hp 260 350

at engine speed rpm 6,600 6,300

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 225/305 350/475

at engine speed rpm 2,750 3,400-3,800

R e

fe re

n ce

243

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dimensions

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 42,0 ft/12.8 m

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

244

Weights

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

X5 3.0si X5 4.8i

Vehicle weight empty with 3rd row seats lbs./kg 4,982/2,260 5,335/2,420

Approved gross vehicle weight

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

lbs./kg

6,327/2,870

5,963/2,705

6,537/2,965

6,173/2,800

Load

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

lbs./kg

1,345/610

1,113/505

1,202/545

970/440

Approved front axle load

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

lbs./kg

2,767/1,255

2,756/1,250

2,965/1,345

2,965/1,345

Approved rear axle load

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

lbs./kg

3,770/1,710

3,417/1,550

3,781/1,715

3,428/1,555

Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100

Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 21.9-61.8/ 620-1,750

21.9-61.8/ 620-1,750

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.5/85 Fuel grade: page 213

of that reserve

X5 3.0si

X5 4.8i

US gal/liters

US gal/liters

approx. 2.1/8

approx. 2.6/10

Windshield washer with headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 For more details: page 64

R e

fe re

n ce

245

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Short commands of voice command system

With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}

To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north}, {Assistance window map direction of travel}, {Assistance window arrow display}, {Assistance window perspective}, {Assistance window current position}, {Assistance window trip computer} or {Assistance window onboard info}

To change scale in assistance window 145 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or {Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function Command

To open phone 189 {Phone}

To dial phone number 193 {Dial number}

To display phone book 194 {A to Z}

To select from the phone book 194 {Call ...} or {Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 195 {Top 8}

To redial 194 {Redial}

To display "Received calls" 195 {Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 195 {Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 191 {Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist 203 {BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" 203 {BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 196 {BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 196 {BMW Contact numbers}

To open "Roadside Assistance" 203 {Roadside Assistance}

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s o

f v o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

246

Navigation

Onboard info

Function Command

To open navigation system 131 {Navigation}

To open "Enter address" 131 {Enter address}

To open "New destination" 131 {New destination}

To display "Input map" 136 {Input map}

To display destination list 138 {Destination list}

To display address book 139 {Address book}

To display route criteria 141 {Route preference}

To start destination guidance 143 {Start guidance}

To end destination guidance 143 {Stop guidance}

To display arrow display 144 {Arrow display}

To display map display 145 {Map}, {Map facing north}, {Map direction of travel} or {Perspective}

To change scale 145 {Scale ... miles} or {Scale ... feet}

To display roads or towns/cities along route 145 {Route list}

To switch on voice instructions 146 {Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 146 {Navigation info off}

To repeat voice instructions 146 {Repeat navigation info}

To open route 141, 145 {Route menu}

To open "New route" 147 {New route}

To display current position 150 {Current position}

Function Command

To open "Car Data" 69 {Car data}

To display computer 69 {Onboard info}

To display trip computer 70 {Trip computer}

To open stopwatch 76 {Stopwatch}

To open speed limit 76 {Limit}

To activate speed limit 76 {Limit on}

To deactivate speed limit 76 {Limit off}

R e

fe re

n ce

247

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Entertainment

Function Command

Tone control 155 {Audio}

To switch on radio 158 {Radio on}, {FM} or {AM}

To open "FM" 158 {FM menu}

To open "AM" 158 {AM menu}

To open "All stations" 158 {FM All stations}

To select radio station 158 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC}, or {Choose station}

To open "Presets" 158 {FM presets} or {AM presets}

To select stored radio station 158 {Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}

To open "Manual" 159 {FM manual}, {AM manual} or {Choose frequency}, {Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open strongest radio stations 159 {AM Autostore}

To open "WB" 161 {Weatherband menu}

To switch on weatherband 161 {Weatherband on}

To select a weatherband station 161 {Choose weatherband station}

To open "SAT" 163 {SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 163 {SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 164 {SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 163 {SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 163 {SAT radio categories}

To open CD player 165 {CD menu}

To switch on CD player 165 {CD}

To open CD changer 166 {CD-changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 166 {CD-changer}

To select CD 166 {CD 1...6}

To select music track 166 {CD track ...}

To select CD and music track 166 {CD 1...6 track ...}

To switch on audio playback with external audio device 171

{Audio Aux}

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s o

f v o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

248

Climate

menu

Function Command

To adjust temperature distribution for front seat heating 47

{Seat heater distribution}

To open "Vent settings" 104 {Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 102 {Automatic programs}

To open "Parked car ventilation" 108 {Parked car operation}

To open "Automatic ventilation" 108 {Automatic ventilation}

To display activation times 109 {Activation time}

Function Command

To open the menu {Settings menu}

"Display off" 21 {Display off}

To open "Info sources" {Info sources}

To open "Settings" {Settings}

To open "Door locks" 30 {Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" 50 {Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 62 {Lighting}

To open "Service requirements" 71 {Service requirements}

To open "Service" 71 {Service}

To open "BMW Service" 203 {BMW service settings}

To display "Check Control messages" 75 {Check Control messages}

To open "Head-Up Display" 94 {Head-up display}

To set brightness of Control Display 78 {Brightness}

To open "Units" 79 {Units}

To open "Languages" 79, 146 {Language}

To open "Time" 78 {Time}

To open "Date" 78 {Date}

To open "PDC" 80 {PDC}

To open "FTM" 87 {FTM}

To open "TPM" 89 {TPM}

To display "Bluetooth" 192 {Bluetooth}

To open "HDC" 85 {HDC}

R e

fe re

n ce

249

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

250

Everything from A to Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions, and indicates where to find them in the text.

A ABS Antilock Brake

System 84 Accessories 6 Access to 3rd row seats 45 Acoustic signal, refer to Check

Control 74 Activated-charcoal filter 106 "Activation time" for parked

car ventilation 109 Active seat 48 Active seat ventilation 47 Active steering 91 warning lamp 91 Adapter for spare key 28 Adaptive brake lamps, refer to

Brake force display 92 Adaptive Drive 86 Adaptive fixing system 117 Adaptive Head Light 98 "Add digits" for mobile

phone 195 "Address book" for

navigation 139 Address for navigation deleting 140 entering 131, 134, 139 selecting 139 storing 139 storing current position 139 "Add to destination

list" 134, 136 Adjusting confirmation signals

for locking and unlocking 31

Adjusting temperature, with automatic climate control with expanded scope 103

Adjusting the tone during audio operation, refer to Tone control 155

Adjusting thigh support 41 "After door opened" 43 "After unlocking" 43 Airbags 92 sitting safely 40 warning lamp 94 Air distribution automatic 102, 107 manual 103 Airing, refer to Ventilation 105 Air recirculation 105 AUC Automatic

recirculated-air control 105 recirculated-air mode 105 "Air recirculation on / off" 50 Air vents 101 refer to Ventilation 105 Air vents of automatic climate

control 101 Air volume 103, 108 AKI, refer to Fuel

specifications 213 Alarm system 34 avoiding unintentional

alarms 35 interior motion sensor 35 switching off alarm 34 switching off tilt alarm

sensor and interior motion sensor 35

tilt alarm sensor 35 "All channels" with satellite

radio 163 "All doors" 30 All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 221

"All stations" display with radio 158

All-wheel drive, refer to xDrive 85

Alterations, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Alternate route, refer to Bypassing traffic congestion 149

"AM", reception range 155, 158

"Angle of view" for DVD system in rear 177

Antenna for mobile phone 188 Antifreeze coolant 225 washer fluid 64 Antilock Brake System

ABS 84 Anti-theft system refer to Alarm system 34 refer to Central locking

system 29 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 244 Approved engine oils 224 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 244 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 113 Around the center console 14 Around the steering wheel 10 Arrival time refer to Computer 69 refer to Starting destination

guidance 143 "Arrow display" for

navigation 144 Arrow view for navigation

system 144

R e

fe re

n ce

251

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Ashtray front 114 rear 115 Assistance systems, refer to

Driving stability control systems 84

Assistance window 20 "Assist. window off" 21 AUC Automatic recirculated-

air control 105 "Audio" 157 Audio 154 controls 154 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 Audio CD with DVD system in

rear 178 Audio device, external 113 "Audio" for DVD system in

rear 184 Automatic air distribution 102, 107 air volume 102, 107 headlamp control 97 service notification 204 steering wheel adjustment,

refer to Easy entry/exit 50 storing stations 159 Automatic car washes 124 also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure Automatic climate control 102 automatic air

distribution 102, 107 switching off 105, 108 with 4-zone control 107 Automatic curb monitor 49 Automatic garage door

opener 110 Automatic lighting refer to Automatic headlamp

control 97 refer to Daytime running

lamps 98 refer to Interior lamps 100 refer to Pathway lighting 97

"Automatic programs" 103 Automatic recirculated-air

control AUC 105 Automatic station search 159 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59 kick-down 61 manually releasing

transmission lock 61 tow-starting 239 with comfort access 36 "Automatic ventilation" 109 AUTO program for automatic

climate control 102, 107 "Autostore" on the radio 160 "AUX" 155, 171, 174 for DVD system in rear 183 with external audio

device 171 AUX-In connection 113 refer to External audio

device 171 Average fuel consumption 69 setting units 79 Average speed, refer to

Computer 69 "Avoid ferries" for

navigation 142 "Avoid highways" for

navigation 141 Avoiding highways for

navigation 141 Avoiding unintentional

alarms 35 "Avoid tollroads" for

navigation 142 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 244 "A - Z" 194, 195

B Backrest contour, refer to

Lumbar support 42 Backrests, refer to Seats 41 Backrest width adjustment 41

Backup camera 81 cleaning 83 displays 83 driver assistance

functions 82 switching off 82 switching on 81 Backup lamps, replacing

bulbs 230 Balance, refer to Tone

control 156 "Balance" for DVD system in

rear 177 Band-aids, refer to First-aid

kit 237 Bass, refer to Tone

control 155 Battery jump starting 237 refer to Vehicle battery 234 Battery disposal remote control with comfort

access 37 vehicle battery 234 Battery replacement remote control for DVD

system in rear 174 remote control with comfort

access 37 Being towed 239 Belts, refer to Safety belts 45 Beverage holder, refer to Cup

holders 114 Blower, refer to Air

volume 103, 108 "BMW Assist" 203, 204, 205 BMW Assist activating 207 breakdown assistance 203 contacting BMW

Hotline 205 information service 205 services offered 202 TeleService 204 "BMW Contact" 196 "BMW Contact

Numbers" 196

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

252

BMW homepage 4 BMW maintenance

system 226 "BMW Services" 206, 208 BMW website 4 Bottle holder, refer to Cup

holders 114 Brackets, adaptive fixing

system 118 Brake Assistant, refer to DBC

Dynamic Brake Control 84 Brake force display 92 Brake lamps brake force display 92 replacing bulbs 230 Brake pads, breaking-in 122 Brake rotors 123 Brakes ABS Antilock Brake

System 84 brake force display 92 breaking-in 122 CBC Cornering Brake

Control 84 DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 84 electronic brake-force

distribution 84 parking brake 57 refer to Braking safely 123 warning lamp 13 Brake system 122 brake pads 122 breaking-in 122 disc brakes 123 Braking safely 123 Breakdown assistance 203 Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 237 Breaking-in the

differential 122 Break-in period 122 "Brightness" 78, 95 for DVD system in rear 176 Brightness of Control

Display 78 Button for starting engine 56

Buttons on steering wheel 11 Bypassing traffic

congestion 149

C Calibrating driver's seat 46 California Proposition 65

Warning 6 "Call" 195, 206 Call accepting 193 displaying accepted 195 ending 194 in absence 195 starting 193 Calling from phone book 194 from Top 8 list 195 redialing 195 refer to telephone operating

instructions Can holder, refer to Cup

holders 114 Capacities 244 Capacity of cargo bay 244 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 234 Car care, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure Car-care products, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

"Car data" 69 Care 227 refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure Cargo refer to Loading 124 securing 125 securing with ski bag 119 Cargo area, refer to Cargo

bay 116 Cargo area cover, refer to Roll-

up cover 116

Cargo bay capacity 244 dividing up 118 emergency operation, refer

to Opening manually 33 expanding 117 opening/closing, refer to

Liftgate 33 opening/closing, refer to

Tailgate 34 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 opening with remote

control 30 Cargo bay cover, refer to Roll-

up cover 116 Caring for artificial leather,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for light-alloy wheels, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the vehicle finish, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Car key, refer to Keys/remote control 28

Car phone 188 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 113 refer to Mobile phone 188 refer to separate operating

instructions Car radio, refer to Radio 158 Car wash 124 also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure with comfort access 36 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 122

R e

fe re

n ce

253

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

"Categories" with satellite radio 163

CBC Cornering Brake Control 84

CBS Condition Based Service 226

"CD" 155, 165 CD, refer to Playing audio

tracks, DVD system in rear 178

CD/DVD player, DVD system in rear 173

CD changer 165 compressed audio files 165 controls 154 fast forward/reverse 169 random sequence 168 repeating a track 168 sampling tracks 167 selecting a CD 166 selecting a track 166 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 "CD" for DVD system in

rear 174 CD player 165 compressed audio files 165 controls 154 fast forward/reverse 169 random sequence 168 repeating a track 168 sampling tracks 167 selecting a track 166 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 Cell phone, refer to Mobile

phone Center armrest 113 Center brake lamp 231 Center console 14 "Central locking" 30 Central locking system 29 comfort access 35 from inside vehicle 32

Changes, technical refer to For your own

safety 5 refer to Parts and

accessories 6 Changing language on

Control Display 79 Changing tires 220 Changing units of measure on

Control Display 79 Changing wheels 232 CHECK button 75 Check Control 74 "Check Control

messages" 75 Checking the air pressure,

refer to Tire inflation pressure 214

Children, transporting 52 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 54 Child restraint systems 52 Child-safety locks 55 Child seats 52 Chime, refer to Check

Control 74 Chrome parts, care, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Cigarette lighter 115 Cleaning, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure "Climate" 47 Clock 67 12h/24h mode 78 setting time 77 Closing from inside 32 from outside 30 Closing fuel filler cap 212 Clothes hooks 114 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting

engine 56 "Color" for DVD system in

rear 176

Comfort access 35 observe in car wash 36 replacing battery 37 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 14 Comfort operation panorama glass

sunroof 30, 32 panorama glass sunroof with

comfort access 36 windows 30, 32 windows with comfort

access 36 with comfort access 36 Comfort seat 41 Comfort start, refer to Starting

engine 56 "Communi-

cation" 193, 203, 205 Compact Disc refer to CD changer 165 refer to CD player 165 Compact wheel inflation pressure 216 wheel change 232 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 56

Compartments, refer to Storage compartments 113

Compass, digital 111 Computer 69 displays in instrument

cluster 69 displays on Control

Display 69 trip computer 70 "Concierge" 205 Condition Based Service

CBS 226 "Confirmation" 31 Connecting car vacuum

cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical devices 115

Connecting headphones 173

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

254

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 69

Consumption indicator, Energy Control 68

Consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 69

"Continue guidance to destination?" 144

"Contrast" for DVD system in rear 176

Control Center, refer to iDrive 16

Control Display, refer to iDrive 16

setting brightness 78 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls, refer to Cockpit 10 Controls of DVD system in

rear 172 Coolant 225 checking level 225 temperature 68 Cooling, maximum 104 Cornering Brake Control

CBC 84 Courtesy lamps 100 Cradle for telephone or mobile

phone 113 Cruise control 64 Cruising range 69 Cup holders 114 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 244 Current fuel consumption 68 "Current position" 150 Current position displaying 150 entering 139 storing 139 "Customer

Relations" 196, 205 Cylinders, refer to Engine

data 242

D Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10 Data 242 capacities 244 dimensions 243 engine 242 technical data 242 weights 244 "Date" 78 Date 67 display format 78 retrieving 67 setting 78 "Date format" 78 "Daytime running lamps" 98 Daytime running lamps 98 DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 84 "Deactivated" 43 Decommissioning the vehicle,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Defrosting windows 103 Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 103 Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 103 "Delete address book" for

navigation 140 "Delete all numbers" on the

mobile phone 196 "Delete data" for

navigation 140 "Delete" for mobile

phone 196 Destination address deleting 140 entering 131, 134 Destination for navigation destination list 138 entry 131 selecting from address

book 139 selecting using

information 137 selecting using voice 134 storing 139

Destination guidance 143 canceling voice

instructions 51 changing specified

route 141 displaying route 144 distance and arrival 143 ending/continuing 143 starting 143 voice instructions 146 volume of voice

instructions 146 Destination list for navigation

system 138 Destinations recently driven

to 138 "Details", DVD system in

rear 181 "Detour" for navigation 149 Detour for navigation 149 "Dial" for mobile phone 193 "Dial number" 194 "Diamond button" 50 Digital clock 67 Digital compass 111 Dimensions 243 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 62 Direction announcements,

refer to Voice instructions 146

Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 146

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 139

Direct selection buttons 21 Displacement, refer to Engine

data 242 "Display" 78 Display, refer to iDrive 16 Displaying images 181 Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 99 "Display off" 21 Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 12 "Display settings" 78, 94

R e

fe re

n ce

255

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Displays on the windshield, refer to Head-Up Display 94

Disposal battery of remote control

with comfort access 37 remote control battery 174 vehicle battery 234 Distance, refer to

Computer 69 "Distance to dest." 70 Distance to destination, refer

to Computer 69 Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 80

Door entry lighting 100 Door key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28 Door lock 31 Door locking, confirmation

signals 31 "Door locks" 30, 31, 72 Doors manual operation 32 remote control 30 DOT Quality Grades 218 Draft-free ventilation 106 Drinks holder, refer to Cup

holders 114 "Driver's door only" 30 Driver's seat, calibrating 46 "Driver's seat climate" 48 Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 97 Driving on poor roads 126 Driving route, refer to

Displaying route 144 Driving stability control

systems 84 Driving through water 123 Driving tips, refer to General

driving notes 122 Dry air, refer to Cooling

function 104 DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 84 indicator lamp 13, 84

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 85

activating 85 indicator lamp 13, 85 "DVD" DVD system in

rear 174 "DVD format" for DVD system

in rear 177 DVD for navigation 130 DVD system in rear 172 CD/DVD player 173 connecting headphones 173 controls 172 displaying images from CD/

DVD 181 DVD country codes 174 external device 183 information on CD/DVD

player 182 playing audio tracks from

CD/DVD 178 playing video from CD/

DVD 174 remote control 173 switching on/off 174 Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 84 "Dynamic route" for

navigation 142 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 84 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 85

E Easy entry/exit 50 Electrical malfunction door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 212 liftgate 33 panorama glass sunroof 39 Electric steering wheel

adjustment 49 Electronic brake-force

distribution 84

Electronic oil level check 223 Emergency call 236 Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 212 liftgate 33 panorama glass sunroof 39 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 61 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 237 "Enable services" 208 "End call" 194 Energy-conscious driving,

refer to Energy Control 68 Energy Control 68 Engine breaking-in 122 data 242 overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 68 speed 242 starting 56 starting, comfort access 36 starting difficulties 57 switching off 57 Engine compartment 223 Engine coolant 225 Engine oil adding 224 additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 224 approved engine oil 224 checking oil level 223 electronic oil level check 223 "Engine oil level" 224 Engine output, refer to Engine

data 242 Engine overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 68 Engine speed 242 Engine starting, refer to

Starting engine 56 "Enter address" 132

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

256

Entering country of destination 132

Entering destination 132 Entering house number or

intersection 133 Entering intersection 133 Entering street 133 "Entertainment" 154 Entertainment sound output

on/off 155 "Equalizer", refer to Tone

control 157 Equalizer, refer to Tone

control 157 "ESN" 162 ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 84

Event Data Recorders 227 Exhaust system, refer to Hot

exhaust system 122 Exterior mirrors 48 automatic dimming

feature 49 automatic heating 49 folding in and out 48 tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 49 External audio

device 113, 171 Eye for tow-starting and

towing, refer to Tow fitting 238

F Fader, refer to Tone

control 156 Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 74 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 35 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 45 warning lamp 46

Fastest route for navigation 141

Fast forward CD changer 169 CD player 169 "Fast route" for

navigation 141 First aid, refer to First-aid

kit 237 First-aid kit 237 Fixing system, adaptive 117 Flashing during locking/

unlocking, refer to Setting confirmation signals 31

Flashlight, refer to Rechargeable flashlight 113

Flat tire changing wheels 232 compact wheel 232 Flat Tire Monitor 87 run-flat tires 88, 90, 220 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 89 Flat Tire Monitor 87 false alarms 87 initializing system 87 show chains 221 system limits 87 warning lamp 88 "FM", reception

range 155, 158 FM, waveband 158 Fog lamps 99 indicator lamp 13, 99 Folding display screen open/

closed, DVD system in rear 172

Folding rear seat back 117 Fold-over rear seat

backrest 117 Footbrake, refer to Braking

safely 123 Footwell lamps 100 For your own safety 5 4-wheel drive system, refer to

xDrive 85

Fresh-air nozzles, refer to Air vents 101

Front airbags 92 Front passenger airbags deactivating 93 refer to Exception of front

passenger seat 52 Front seat adjustment 41 "FTM" 88 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 87 Fuel 213 capacity 244 display 68 high-quality brands 213 quality 213 specifications 213 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 68 Fuel consumption display,

computer, average fuel consumption 69

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 68

Fuel filler door 212 closing 212 opening 212 releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 212 Fuses 234

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 110

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 213

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 68

General driving notes 122 Glass sunroof, electric comfort operation from

outside 32 comfort operation with

comfort access 36 remote control 30

R e

fe re

n ce

257

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Glove compartment 113 lighting 113 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 130 Grills, refer to Ventilation 105 Grills of the automatic climate

control 101 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 244

H Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 57 Hand lamp, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 113 Hands-free system, refer to

Microphone 14 Hazard warning flashers 15 HDC Hill Descent Control 85 Head airbags 92 Headlamp control,

automatic 97 Headlamp flasher 62 Headlamps 97 care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure cleaning, refer to Washer/

wiper system 63 Head Light, refer to Adaptive

Head Light 98 Head restraints 43 removing 43 sitting safely 40 "Head-Up Display" 95 Head-Up Display 94 Heated mirrors 49 rear window 103 seats 47 steering wheel 50 Heating 101 exterior mirrors 49 interior 101 rear window 103 residual heat 105 seats 47 steering wheel 50

Heating with engine switched off, refer to Residual heat 105

Heavy cargo, refer to Securing cargo 125

Height, refer to Dimensions 243

Height adjustment seats 41 steering wheel 49 High beams 62, 99 headlamp flasher 99 indicator lamp 13 Highs, refer to Treble and

bass 155 High water, refer to Driving

through water 123 Highway, refer to Route

criteria 141 Hill Descent Control HDC 85 Hills 123 Holder for cups 114 Home address 141 "Home address" for

navigation 141 Homepage 4 Hood 222 Horn 10 Hot exhaust system 122 "Hour memo" 78 "House number" for

destination entry 134 Hydraulic brake assistant,

refer to DBC Dynamic Brake Control 84

Hydroplaning 123

I Ice, refer to Outside

temperature warning 67 ID3 tag, refer to Information on

track 167

iDrive 16 assistance window 20 changing language 79 changing menu page 19 changing settings 77 changing units of measure

and display type 79 confirming selection or

entry 19 controller 16 controls 16 displays, menus 17 selecting menu item 19 setting brightness 78 setting date 78 setting time 77 start menu 17 status information 20 symbols 18 Ignition 56 switched off 56 switched on 56 Ignition key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28 Ignition key position 1, refer to

Radio readiness 56 Ignition key position 2, refer to

Ignition on 56 Ignition lock 56 starting engine with comfort

access 36 Independent ventilation, refer

to Parked car ventilation 108 Indicator/warning lamps 13 active steering 91 airbags 94 DSC 13, 84 DTC 13, 85 fasten safety belt 46 Flat Tire Monitor 88 fog lamps 13 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 90 Individual air distribution 104 Individually programmable

buttons on steering wheel 50

Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 28

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

258

Inflation pressure, refer to Tire inflation pressure 214

Inflation pressure monitoring refer to Flat Tire Monitor 87 refer to TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 89 Information on another location 137 on country 137 on current position 137 on destination location 137 "Information on

destination" 138 Information service 205 "Info sources" 72 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor 87 refer to Power failure 234 refer to Setting date 78 refer to Setting time 77 seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 42 "Input map" 136 Installation location drive for navigation DVD 130 mobile phone 113 Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice instructions 146

Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 99 Instrument panel refer to Cockpit 10 refer to Instrument

cluster 12 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote

control 110 Interesting destination for

navigation 137 "Interim time" 76 Interior lamps 100 switching on with remote

control 30 Interior motion sensor 35 switching off 35

Interior rearview mirror 49 automatic dimming

feature 49 compass 111 Intermittent mode of the

wipers 63

J Jacking points 233 Joystick refer to iDrive 16 refer to Selector lever,

selecting transmission positions 60

Jumpering, refer to Jump starting 237

Jump starting 237

K Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort

access 35 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort access 35 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 28 "Keypad" 197 Keys 28 key-related settings, refer to

Personal Profile 28 Kick-down, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 61

Knock control 213

L Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

low beams 97 Lamps and bulbs 228 "Language / Units" 79 for navigation 146 "Language" for DVD system

in rear 177 "Languages" 79 for DVD system in rear 176 for navigation 146

Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 125

Last destinations, refer to Destination list 138

"Last seat pos." 43 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 54 LEDs light-emitting

diodes 229 Length, refer to

Dimensions 243 License plate lamp, replacing

bulbs 231 Liftgate 33 closing 33 locking and unlocking from

inside 32 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 opening manually 33 Light-emitting diodes

LEDs 229 Lighter 115 Lighter socket 115 "Lighting" 63, 98 Lighting instruments 99 of the vehicle, refer to

Lamps 97 Light switch 97 "Limit" 76 Loading securing cargo 125 stowing cargo 125 vehicle 124 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 125 "Lock after driving" 32 Lock buttons in the doors,

refer to Locking 32 Locking from inside 32 from outside 30 setting confirmation

signals 31 without key, refer to Comfort

access 35

R e

fe re

n ce

259

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Locking and unlocking doors from inside 32 from outside 30 setting confirmation

signals 31 Locking without key, refer to

Comfort access 35 Low beams 97 automatic 97 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 42 Lows, refer to Treble and

bass 155 Lug bolts 233 tightening torque, refer to

After mounting 233 wrench 232 Luggage compartment

capacity, refer to Cargo bay capacity 244

Luggage net, refer to Separation net 116

Luggage rack, refer to Roof- mounted luggage rack 126

Lumbar support 42

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 221 "Main menu" for DVD system

in rear 177 Maintenance refer to Service and

Warranty Information Booklet for US models 226

refer to Service requirements 71

refer to Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models 226

Maintenance system 226 Malfunction door lock 32 fuel filler door 212 liftgate 33 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 74 Manual air distribution 103

Manually releasing transmission lock 61

Manual mode, automatic transmission with Steptronic 61

Manual operation door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 212 panorama glass sunroof 39 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 61 "Manual" with radio 159 Map changing scale 145 destination entry 136 "Map direction of travel" 145 "Map facing north" 145 Map facing north 145 Master key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28 Maximum cooling 104 Maximum speed for winter tires 221 with compact wheel 234 Memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 42

"Menu" for DVD system in rear 177 with rear entertainment 175 Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Message list for traffic

information 148 Microfilter 106 Microphone for mobile phone 14 for voice command

system 14 Mirror dimming feature 49 Mirrors 48 automatic curb monitor 49 folding in and out 48 heating 49 memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 42

"Missed calls" 194 Missed calls 195

Mobile communications devices in vehicle 122

Mobile phone accepted calls 195 adjusting volume 192 calling 193 ending call 194 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 113 missed calls 195 operation via iDrive 192 redialing 195 refer to separate operating

instructions Top 8 195 touch tone dialing 196 Mobile phones, use in the

interior, refer to Mobile communications devices 122

Monitor, refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring pressure of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 87 "Monitor on / off" 50 MP3, refer to Compressed

audio files 165 Multi-function steering wheel,

refer to Buttons on steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 62 refer to Washer/wiper

system 63 Music track, refer to

Tracks 166 "Mute on / off" 50

N "Navigation" 69, 131 Navigation destination entering manually 131, 134 home address 141 selecting via map 136 Navigation drive, installation

location 130 Navigation DVD 130

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

260

Navigation instructions, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 146

Navigation system 130 address book 139 changing route 147 destination entry 131 destination guidance in

assistance window 130 destination list 138 displaying current

position 150 displaying route 144 ending/continuing

destination guidance 143 entering a destination

manually 131, 134 last destinations 138 navigation DVD 130 opening 131 route list 145 searching for a special

destination 137 selecting destination using

information 137 selecting destination via

map 136 selecting route criteria 141 starting destination

guidance 143 switching off, refer to

Ending/continuing destination guidance 143

voice instructions 146 volume adjustment 146 "Navigation voice

instructions" 50 Neck support, refer to Head

restraints 43 "New address" for

navigation 139 "New data request" for

BMW Assist 205 "New destination" 131, 136 New remote control 28 "New route" 147 New wheels and tires 220

"Next entertainment source" 50

"No video signal" for DVD system in rear 183

Nozzles, refer to Windshield washer nozzles 64

"NTSC" for DVD system in rear 184

Nylon rope, refer to Tow- starting and towing 238

O OBD socket 227 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 213 Odometer 67 Oil additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 224 approved engine oils 224 consumption, refer to

Checking engine oil level 223

level 223 refilling, refer to Adding

engine oil 224 Oil change interval, refer to

Service requirements 71 "On a new destination" for

navigation 137 Onboard computer, refer to

iDrive 16 "Onboard info" 69 Onboard toolkit 228 "On destination" 137 "On location" 137 Opening and closing comfort access 35 from inside 32 from outside 30 panorama glass sunroof 38 using remote control 30 using the door lock 31

Operation by voice for mobile phone 197

adjusting volume 198 canceling 198 correcting phone

number 199 dialing phone number 199 placing a call 199 redialing 200 voice commands 198 voice phone book 199 Operation on poor roads 126 "Options" 206 Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17 Outlet slits, refer to Air

vents 101 Output, refer to Engine

data 242 Outside air, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Outside temperature display 67

changing unit of measure 79 "Overview" for DVD system in

rear 181

P Panic mode 30 Panorama glass sunroof 38 moving manually 39 Park Distance Control PDC 80 "Parked car operation" 109 "Parked car ventilation" 109 Parked car ventilation 108 activating activation

time 109 preselecting activation

times 109 switching on and off

directly 108 Parking, vehicle 57 Parking aid refer to Backup camera 81 refer to PDC Park Distance

Control 80

R e

fe re

n ce

261

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Parking assistant, refer to PDC Park Distance Control 80

Parking brake 57 indicator lamp 13 Parking lamps 97 Parts and accessories 6 "Passenger's seat climate" 48 Passenger-side exterior

mirror, tilting down 49 "Pathway lighting" 98 Pathway lighting 97 "Pause" for DVD system in

rear 178 "PDC" 81 "PDC display on" 81 PDC Park Distance Control 80 Personal Profile 28 "Perspective" 145 Phone book 192 creating and editing voice

phone book 199 Phone numbers deleting from phone

book 196 dialing 193 most recent numbers 195 selecting in phone book 195 Top 8 195 "Photo" for DVD system in

rear 174, 181 Pinch protection system panorama glass sunroof 39 power windows 37 Plasters, refer to First-aid

kit 237 "Play" for DVD system in

rear 178, 180 in audio mode 166 with satellite radio 163 Playing videos, DVD system in

rear 174 Plug-in unit for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 56

Position displaying 150 storing, refer to Storing

current position 139 Power failure 234 Power windows, refer to

Windows 37 Preselecting activation times

of the parked car ventilation 109

"Presets" display with radio 158 with satellite radio 163 Pressure, tires 214 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 89

"Profile" 208 Programmable buttons on

steering wheel 50 Programmable memory

buttons 21 Protective function, refer to

Pinch protection system panorama glass sunroof 39 windows 37

R Radio Autostore 159 controls 154 listen to station 158 sampling stations 159 satellite radio 162 selecting frequency

manually 159 selecting

waveband 154, 158 station search 159 station with the best

reception 159 storing stations 160 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 Weather Band 161

Radio key, refer to Keys/ remote control 28

Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 56

Radio readiness 56 switched off 56 switched on 56 with comfort access 36 Rain sensor 63 "Random" for DVD system in rear 179 refer to Random

sequence 168 "Random all" for DVD system in rear 180 in audio mode 168 "Random directory" for DVD system in rear 180 in audio mode 168 Random sequence 168 "RDS" Radio Data

System 161 Reading lamps 100 "Rear climate control" 107 "Rear enabled" 172 Rear entertainment, refer to

DVD system in rear 172 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 230 replacing bulbs 230 Rear seat backrest,

folding 117 Rear seats 44 adjusting head restraints 44 folding over backrest 117 heating 47, 48 Rear ventilation 106 rear automatic climate

control 107 3rd row seats 106 Rearview mirror 48 Rear window heating 103 replacing wiper blade 228 windshield wiper 64, 124 Rear window safety switch 38 Rear window wiper, replacing

wiper blade 228

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

262

"Received calls" 194 Recent numbers in mobile

phone 195 Reception level of mobile

phone, refer to Status information 20

Rechargeable flashlight 113 Recirculated-air mode 105 air recirculation 105 AUC Automatic

recirculated-air control 105 Recording times, refer to

Stopwatch 76 "Redial" for mobile phone 194 Reflectors, refer to Tail

lamps 230 Refueling 212 Releasing hood 222 refer to Unlocking 35 "Relock door if not

opened" 32 Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 69 Remaining distance to

destination, refer to Computer 69

Remote control 28 comfort access 35 DVD system in rear 173 garage door opener 110 liftgate 30 malfunction 31, 36 replacing battery 37 Removing condensation on

the windows 103 "Repeat" for DVD system in rear 179 in audio mode 168 "Repeat directory" for DVD system in

rear 178, 181 in audio mode 168 "Repeat track" for DVD system in

rear 178, 180 in audio mode 168 Replacement fuses 234

Replacement of tires, refer to Changing wheels 232

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 228

Replacing tires 220 Replacing wheels/tires, refer

to New wheels and tires 220 Replacing wiper blades 228 Reporting an accident, refer to

Initiating an emergency call 236

Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 68 Reservoir for washer

systems 64 "Reset" 88, 90 for DVD system in

rear 176, 177 stopwatch 76 tone settings 157 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 157 "resetting FTM " 88 Residual heat 105 Restraint systems for children 52 refer to Safety belts 45 Retreaded tires 220 "Return" for DVD system in

rear 177 Reverse CD changer 169 CD player 169 Reverse gear, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 60

Road map 145 "Roadside Assistance" 203 Roadside Assistance 237 Roadside parking lamps 99 Roller sun blinds 113 Roll-up cover 116 Roof load capacity 244 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 126 Rope, refer to Tow-starting

and towing 238

Rotary pushbutton, refer to iDrive 16

Route 141 changing 147 displaying 144 displaying arrow display 144 displaying map view 145 displaying streets and

towns/cities 145 displaying towns/cities 145 list 145 selecting 141 selecting criteria 141 RSC, refer to Run-flat

tires 220 Run-flat tires 220 continuing driving with a

damaged tire 88, 90 flat tire 88, 90 new wheels and tires 220 tire inflation

pressure 88, 90, 214 tire replacement 220, 221

S Safety 5 Safety belts 45 damage 46 sitting safely 40 warning lamp 46 Safety belt tensioners refer to Airbags 92 refer to Safety belts 45 Safety systems ABS Antilock Brake

System 84 airbags 92 DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 84 safety belts 45 "SAT" 155, 162 Satellite radio 162 displaying additional

information 163 enabling 162 selecting channel 163 storing channel 163

R e

fe re

n ce

263

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

"Scan" for DVD system in rear 179 sampling stations with

radio 159 sampling tracks with CD 167 Scan CD changer 167 CD player 167 radio 159 "Scan all" for DVD system in rear 180 in audio mode 167 "Scan directory" for DVD system in rear 180 in audio mode 167 Screen, refer to iDrive 16 "Screen brightness" for DVD

system in rear 176 Screw thread for tow

fitting 238 SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 162 "Seat heater distribution" 47 Seats 41 adjusting 41 comfort seat 41 heating 47 lumbar support 42 memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 42

sitting safely 40 storing the setting 42 thigh support 41 ventilation, refer to Active

seat ventilation 47 2nd row seats 44 Securing load refer to Securing cargo 125 with ski bag, refer to

Securing cargo 119 "Select as

destination" 138, 206 "Select current speed" 76 Selecting audio source 154 Selecting country for

navigation 132

Selecting frequency manually 159

Selecting menu items 19 Selecting new scale for

navigation 145 Selector lever, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 60

Selector lever lock, refer to Reverse gear 60

Self-leveling suspension 87 Separation net 116 "Service" 72, 204, 223 Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 237 Service and Warranty

Information Booklet for US models 226

Service interval indicator, refer to Service requirements 71

"Service notification" 204 "Service Request" 196, 204 "Service

requirements" 72, 204, 224 Service requirements 71 also refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 226 "Service Status" 208 "Set date" 78 "Set" on trip computer 70 "Set service date" 73 "Set time" 77 "Settings" 206, 207 Settings changing on Control

Display 77 clock, 12h/24h mode 78 configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 28 "Settings" for unlocking 30 Setting speed limit 76 Setting time, refer to

Preselecting activation times 109

"SET" with rear entertainment 175

Shifting, automatic transmission with Steptronic 61

Short commands of voice command system 245

Shortest route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 141

"Short route" for navigation 141

Shoulder support 41 "Show current position" 137 "Show destination

position" 137 Shuffled, refer to Random CD changer 168 CD player 168 Side airbags 92 Side marker lamps, replacing

bulbs 229 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 40 with airbags 40 with head restraint 40 with safety belts 40 Ski bag 118 Slide show, refer to Displaying

images 181 Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to

Panorama glass sunroof 38 Slope assistant, refer to

Starting assistant 123 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 114 Snow chains 221 Socket for Onboard

Diagnostics interface 227 Socket for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 56 Sockets, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 115 Song search, refer to

Sampling tracks 167 SOS, refer to Initiating an

emergency call 236 Spare fuses 234 Spare key 28 adapter 28

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

264

Spare remote control 28 Spare wheel refer to Changing

wheels 232 refer to Compact wheel 232 Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 224 Specified oil grades, refer to

Approved engine oils 224 Speed with compact wheel 234 with winter tires 221 Speed-dependent

volume 156 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 76 Speedometer 12 "Speed volume", refer to Tone

control 156 Sport program, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 61

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 84

"Standard" for DVD system in rear 177, 184

"Star button" 50 Star button 50 Start/Stop button 56 "Start" for stopwatch 76 "Start guidance" 134, 143 Starting, refer to Starting

engine 56 Starting assistance, refer to

Jump starting 237 Starting assistant 123 Starting difficulties jump starting 237 refer to Special starting

conditions 57 Starting off on slopes, refer to

Starting assistant 123 Start menu, iDrive 17 "Start service" 203 "State / Province" for

destination entry 132

"State inspection" 73 Station, refer to Radio 158 "Status" 73 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5 Steering wheel adjusting 49 buttons on steering

wheel 11 easy entry/exit 50 heating 50 lock 56 memory 42 programmable buttons 50 "Steering wheel buttons" 50 Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 91 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with Steptronic 59

"Stop" for stopwatch 76 "Stopwatch" 76 Stopwatch 76 Storage compartments 113 "Store" with radio 160 with satellite radio 164 "Store in address book" for

navigation 139 Storing current position 139 Storing radio stations 160 Storing sitting position, refer

to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory 42

Storing tires 221 "Street" for destination

entry 133 "Subtitles" for DVD system in

rear 177 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 214 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching cooling function on

and off 104 Switching off engine 57

Switching on audio 154 CD changer 154 CD player 154 radio 154 Switching on hour signal 78 Swiveling headlamps, refer to

Adaptive Head Light 98 Symbols 4 indicator/warning lamps 13 navigation system 150 traffic information with

navigation system 147

T Tachometer 68 Tailgate 34 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 opening manually 33 Tail lamps 230 replacing bulbs 230 Tank contents, refer to

Capacities 244 Target cursor for

navigation 136 Technical alterations, refer to

For your own safety 5 Technical data 242 Telematic, refer to

TeleService, BMW Assist 202

Telephone refer to Mobile phone 188 refer to separate operating

instructions "Telephone list" 50 TeleService 204 Temperature adjusting in upper body

region 103 adjusting with automatic

climate control 103, 107 of coolant, refer to Coolant

temperature 68

R e

fe re

n ce

265

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Temperature display outside temperature 67 setting units 79 temperature warning 67 Temperature warning 67 Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 64 "Terminate services" 207 "Text language" 79 The individual vehicle 5 Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 231 3rd row seats 45 "TI" 148 Tightening torque of the lug

bolts, refer to After mounting 233

Tilt alarm sensor, switching off 35

Tilting down passenger-side exterior mirror 49

"Time" 77 "Time / Date" 77, 78 "Time format" 78 Timer, refer to Preselecting

activation times 109 "Timer 1" for parked car

ventilation 109 "Timer 2" for parked car

ventilation 109 Tire inflation pressures 214 Tire pressure loss 88, 90 Tire pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 87 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 89 Tire Quality Grading 218 Tire replacement, new wheels

and tires 220

Tires age 218 air loss 88, 90 breaking-in 122 changing 220 condition 219 damage 219 flat tire, refer to Changing

wheels 232 inflation pressure 214 new wheels and tires 220 pressure monitoring 87 pressure monitoring, refer to

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 89

replacing 232 retreaded tires 220 run-flat tires 220 size 218 tread 219 wear indicators 219 wheel/tire combination 220 winter tires 221 "Title" for DVD system in

rear 177 TMC station, refer to Traffic

information 147 "Tone" 155 for DVD system in rear 177 Tone in audio mode adjusting 155 middle setting 157 Tone on locking/unlocking 31 Tools, refer to Onboard

toolkit 228 "Top 8" for mobile phone 194 Torque engine 242 lug bolts, refer to After

mounting 233 Touch tone dialing 196 Tow fitting 238 Towing 238 tow fitting 238 "Town / City" for destination

entry 132 Town/city for destination

entry 132 Tow-starting 238, 239

"TPM" 90 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 89 resetting system 89 system limits 89 warning lamp 90 Tracks finding 167 random sequence 168 sampling, scan 167 Track width, refer to

Dimensions 243 Traction-assist feature, refer

to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 84

Traction control, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 84

Traffic congestion bypassing 149 displaying traffic

information 147 "Traffic Info" 147 Traffic information for

navigation depiction in route map 149 displaying 148 during destination

guidance 149 switching on/off 147 symbols 150 Transmission automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59 manually releasing

transmission lock on automatic transmission with Steptronic 61

starting assistant 123 Transmission positions, refer

to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 59

Transporting children safely 52

Transport securing device, refer to Securing cargo 125

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tread depth 219

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

266

Treble, refer to Tone control 155

"Treble / Bass" for DVD system in rear 177

"Trip computer" 70 Trip computer 70 Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 67 "Triple turn signal" 63 Trip odometer 67 Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 243 Turn signals 62 indicator lamp 12 replacing bulbs 229

U Underbody protection, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ UTQR 218

"Units" 79 Units average fuel

consumption 79 temperature 79 Universal garage-door

opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 110

Universal remote control 110 "Unlock button" 30 Unlocking from inside 32 from outside 30 without key, refer to Comfort

access 35 Unlocking without key, refer to

Comfort access 35 "Unlock rear menu" for DVD

system in rear 172 "Update services" 206 Used batteries refer to Disposal 234 refer to Replacing battery 37

V Valve screw caps, refer to

After mounting 233 Vehicle battery 234 breaking-in 122 care 227 care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure decommissioning, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

loading 124 measurements, refer to

Dimensions 243 parking 57 washing, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure weights 244 "Vehicle / Tires" for

unlocking 30 Vehicle jack 232 jacking points 233 Vehicle position, refer to

Displaying current position 150

Ventilation 105 draft-free 106 in the rear 106 rear automatic climate

control 108 3rd row seats 106 while stationary 108 Vent outlets of automatic

climate control 101 Vents, refer to Ventilation 105 "Vent settings" 104 "Video settings" for DVD

system in rear 176 Voice, refer to Voice

instructions for navigation system 146

Voice command system 23 short commands 245

Voice instructions for navigation system 146

muting 51, 146 repeating 51, 146 switching on/off 51, 146 volume 146 Voice phone book 199 Volume mobile phone 192 setting speed-

dependent 156 voice instructions 146 Volume distribution in audio

mode front/rear 156 right/left 156 Volume of warning tones 79

W Warning lamps, refer to

Indicator and warning lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 74

Warning tone, volume 79 Warning triangle 236 Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models 226

Washer/wiper system 63 rain sensor 63 washer fluid 64 windshield washer

nozzles 64 Washer fluid 64 capacity of the reservoir 64 Washer fluid reservoir 64 Washing the vehicle, also refer

to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 123

Waveband for radio 158 "WB" 155, 161 Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 219 Weather Band 161 Website 4

R e

fe re

n ce

267

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Weights 244 Wheel/tire combination, refer

to New wheels and tires 220 Wheel/tire damage 219 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 243 Wheels and tires 214 Width, refer to

Dimensions 243 Windows 37 comfort operation 30 comfort operation from

outside 32 comfort operation with

comfort access 36 safety switch 38 Windshield cleaning, refer to Washer/

wiper system 63 defrosting, refer to

Defrosting windows 103 displays, refer to Head-Up

Display 94 Windshield washer system refer to Washer/wiper

system 63 windshield washer

nozzles 64 Windshield wipers, refer to

Washer/wiper system 63 replacing wiper blades 228 Winter tires 221 setting speed limit 76 storage 221 "With highways" for

navigation 141 Word matching principle for

navigation 142 Working in the engine

compartment 222 Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer

to Onboard toolkit 228

X xDrive 85

Z "Zoom" for DVD system in

rear 177

Refueling So that you will have important specifications available when you stop to refuel, we recom- mend that you supplement the following tables with data which apply to your vehicle. Consult the index for individual specifications.

Fuel

Engine oil

Tire inflation pressure

Quality

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Preferred oil grade

Summer tires Front Rear

Winter tires Front Rear

Up to 4 perso

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the X5 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW X5 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW X5 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW X5 4.8i SAV X5 Series 2007 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.